2020 GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owners Manual€¦ · GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owner Manual...

84186890 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

20_GMC_Sierra_SierraDenali_COV_en_US_84186890B_2019AUG27.ai 1 8/12/2019 1:26:17 PM

GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-13337776) - 2020 - CRC - 8/27/19

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . 9

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . 117

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 176

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 185

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 439

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 462

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 472

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, SIERRA, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84186890 B Second Printing ©2019 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Donot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

P : Do Not Apply High PressureWater

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

R : Fuse Block Cover LockLocation

+ : Fuses

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints


4 Introduction

Q : Keep Fuse Block CoversProperly Installed

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Stop/Start

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


Introduction 5

Instrument Panel Overview


6 Introduction

1. Tow/Haul Mode (On SomeModels). See Driver ModeControl 0 238.

Automatic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive 0 227.

Driver Mode Control 0 238 (IfEquipped).

2. Air Vents 0 182.

3. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 152(If Equipped).

4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 170.

Windshield Wiper/Washer0 119.

5. Instrument Cluster 0 126.

6. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 221.

Range Selection Mode. SeeManual Mode 0 224.

7. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 168.

8. Infotainment 0 176.

9. Climate Control Systems 0 177(If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 179 (If Equipped).

10. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 60 (If Equipped).

11. A Lane Keep Assist (LKA)(1500 Series) 0 278 (IfEquipped).

X Park Assist Switch (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 257.

h Auto Stop Disable Switch(If Equipped). See Stop/StartSystem 0 213.

5 Power Release Tailgate(If Equipped). See Tailgate0 29.

| Hazard Warning Flashers0 169.

g Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 235.

A DC/AC Switch. See PowerOutlets 0 121.

@ Lane Departure Warning(LDW) (2500/3500 Series)0 276 (If Equipped).

5 Hill Descent Control Switch(If Equipped). See Hill DescentControl (HDC) 0 237.

j Power Assist Steps 0 34 (IfEquipped).

L Express Window DownButton (If Equipped). SeePower Windows 0 47.

Tow/Haul Mode 0 227 (OnSome Models).

12. Power Outlet (AlternatingCurrent) (If Equipped). SeePower Outlets 0 121.

13. Power Outlets 0 121.

14. USB Port. See the infotainmentmanual.

15. Wireless Charging 0 122 (IfEquipped).


Introduction 7

16. Trailer Brake Control Panel (IfEquipped). See “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System”under Towing Equipment0 296.

17. ENGINE START/STOP. SeeIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.

18. Steering Wheel Controls (IfEquipped). See theinfotainment manual.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

19. Horn 0 119.

20. Hood Release. See Hood0 330.

21. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 118 (Out of View).

22. Cruise Control 0 243.

Adaptive Cruise Control (1500Series) 0 245 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 268 (If Equipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 119(If Equipped).

23. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 137.

24. Electric Parking Brake 0 233.

25. Fog Lamps 0 170 (IfEquipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 172.

Exterior Cargo Lamps 0 171.

Exterior Lamp Controls 0 165.

Task Lighting 0 171 (IfEquipped).


8 Introduction

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 9

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Keys (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . 12Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 25Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 27Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 36

Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 37

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . 43Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 44Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 44Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Keys and Locks

Keys (Key Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain to

reduce the risk of unintentionallymoving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key is used for the ignition, alldoor locks, and the glove box.

If equipped with memory seats,keys 1 and 2 are linked to seatingpositions of memory 1 or 2. SeeMemory Seats 0 58.

Programming Keys

Follow these procedures to programup to eight keys to the vehicle.

Programming with TwoRecognized Keys

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the ignition off, andremove the key.

3. Quickly, within five seconds,insert the second originalalready programmed key in theignition and turn the ignition on.

4. Turn the ignition off, andremove the key.

5. Insert the key to beprogrammed and turn theignition on within five seconds.

6. After a few seconds, thesecurity light will turn off oncethe key has been programmed.

7. Repeat Steps 1–5 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming withoutRecognized Keys

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If two currently recognized keys arenot available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn the ignition on. Thesecurity light will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition off.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turnthe ignition on; the key is



learned and all previouslyknown keys will no longer workwith the vehicle.

6. To learn a second key, turn theignition off, insert the secondkey to be learned, and turn theignition on.

After two keys are learned, theremaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with TwoRecognized Keys.”

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 466.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 476.

Keys (Keyless Access)

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withan ignition key or RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isdangerous and children or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. They could operate thepower window or other controls ormake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keyin the ignition or with the RKEtransmitter in the vehicle, andchildren or others could be caughtin the path of a closing window.Do not leave children in a vehiclewith the ignition key or an RKEtransmitter.

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess system, the transmitter hasa button on the side of thetransmitter used to remove the key.

This key is used for the driver doorand glove box.



Press the button to remove the key.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisormay remotely unlock the vehicle.See OnStar Overview 0 476.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 466.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 58.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 472.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Key Access)The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 13.

/ : Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/ until

the turn signal lamps flash or for at



least four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 25.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsmay flash and/or the horn maysound on the second press toindicate locking has occurred.If enabled, the horn chirps when Qis pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.

See Vehicle Alarm System 0 36.

If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding Q for

one second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed again

within three seconds, all remainingdoors unlock. The interior lamps

may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

disarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 36.

If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding K for

one second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Press and hold K to remotely open

the windows, if enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 156.

x : Press twice quickly to releasethe tailgate, if equipped.

7 : Press and release to initiate thevehicle locator. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more than

three seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off

when the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See your dealer for transmitterprogramming.



Battery Replacement

{ Warning

Never allow children to play withthe RKE transmitter. Thetransmitter contains a smallbattery, which can be a chokinghazard. If swallowed, internalburns can occur, resulting insevere injury or death. Seekmedical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury, do nottouch metal surfaces on the RKEtransmitter when it has beenexposed to extreme heat. Thesesurfaces can be hot to the touchat temperatures above 59 °C(138 °F).

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

Caution

Always replace the battery withthe correct type. Replacing thebattery with an incorrect typecould potentially create a risk ofbattery explosion. Dispose ofused batteries according toinstructions and local laws. Donot attempt to burn, crush, or cutthe used battery, and avoidexposing the battery toenvironments with extremely lowair pressures or hightemperatures.

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYdisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

To replace the battery:

1. Separate and remove the backcover of the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a coin.



2. Press and slide the batterydown toward the pocket of thetransmitter in the direction ofthe key ring. Do not use ametal object

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitterback cover top side first, andthen the bottom toward thekey ring.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation(Keyless Access)The Keyless Access system allowsfor vehicle entry when thetransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See“Keyless Access Operation” later inthis section.

The RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.


The key that is part of the RKEtransmitter can be used for all locks.

Remove the key by pressing thebutton on the side of the RKEtransmitter near the bottom and pullthe key out. Never pull the key outwithout pressing the button.

See your dealer if a new transmitteris needed.



/ : Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/ until

the turn signal lamps flash or for atleast four seconds. The engine maybe started from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 25.

Q : Press to lock all doors and thetailgate, if equipped.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash and/or the horn may sound onthe second press to indicate lockinghas occurred. If enabled, the horn

chirps when Q is pressed again

within three seconds. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

If the driver door is open when Q is

pressed, all doors will lock and thenthe driver door will immediatelyunlock, if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q arms the alarm system.


If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding Q for

one second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

K : Press once to unlock only thedriver door. If K is pressed again

within three seconds, all remainingdoors and the tailgate unlock. The

interior lamps may come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on.

If enabled, the turn signal lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. If enabled, the exteriorlamps may turn on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

disarms the alarm system. SeeVehicle Alarm System 0 36.

If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding K for

one second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Press and hold K until the windows

fully open, if remote windowoperation is enabled. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

x : Press twice quickly to releasethe tailgate, if equipped.



7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and hold 7 for more than

three seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off

when the ignition is turned on or 7is pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system allowsfor doors and the tailgate to beaccessed without pressing the RKEtransmitter button. The RKEtransmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)of the tailgate or door being opened.If the vehicle has this feature, therewill be a button on the outside doorhandles.

Keyless Access can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock press from thedriver door. Keyless Unlocking canalso be turned off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 58.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Driver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors and the tailgatewill unlock.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more thanfive seconds since the first lock/unlock button press.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.



Keyless Unlocking/Locking fromthe Passenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft)of the door handle, pressing thelock/unlock button on a passengerdoor handle will unlock all doors.Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has beenopened and all doors are nowclosed.

Disable/Enable Keyless Unlockingof Exterior Door Handles andTailgate

If equipped, keyless unlocking of theexterior door handles and tailgatecan be disabled and enabled.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press andhold Q and K on the RKEtransmitter at the same time forapproximately three seconds. Theturn signal lamps will flash four

times quickly to indicate access isdisabled. Using any exterior handleto unlock the doors or open thetailgate will cause the turn signallamps to flash four times quickly,indicating access is disabled.If disabled, disarm the alarm systembefore starting the vehicle.

Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press andhold Q and K on the RKEtransmitter at the same time forapproximately three seconds. Theturn signal lamps will flash twicequickly to indicate access isenabled.

Passive Locking

This feature will lock the vehicleseveral seconds after all doors areclosed, if the vehicle is off and atleast one RKE transmitter has beenremoved from the interior, or noneremain in the interior.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.

If passive locking is enabled, thedoors may lock with the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle. Donot leave the RKE transmitter in anunattended vehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see “Remote Lock, Unlock,Start” under Vehicle Personalization0 156.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive lockingby pressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or untilthree chimes are heard. Passivelocking will then remain disableduntil Q on the interior door ispressed, or until the vehicle isturned on.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off andan RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle, the horn will chirp three



times after all doors are closed. Toturn on or off see VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door openand then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay NO REMOTE DETECTEDand the horn will chirp three times.This occurs only once each time thevehicle is driven. To turn on or offsee Vehicle Personalization 0 156.

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a deadtransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 26.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammed

so that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Each vehicle can haveup to eight transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere are two recognizedtransmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the key from arecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder oron the passenger seat.

3. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle. Then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE#3, 4, 5 ETC.

Transmitter Pocket without BucketSeats (Lower Compartment)



Transmitter Pocket with BucketSeats

4. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

5. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket andpress K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

7. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up toeight transmitters. This feature isnot available in Canada. Thisprocedure will take approximately30 minutes to complete. The vehiclemust be off and all transmitters tobe programmed must be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key fromthe transmitter.

2. Insert the vehicle key into thekey lock cylinder on the driverdoor handle; then turn the keycounterclockwise, to the unlockposition, five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN,then press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC will again displayREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC should now displayREADY FOR REMOTE # 1.





5. Place the new transmitter inthe transmitter pocket/insert.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter islearned, the DIC display willshow that it is ready to programthe next transmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter fromthe transmitter pocket/insertand press K or Q on thetransmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds toexit programming mode.

8. Return the key back into thetransmitter.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEYWAS DETECTED PLACE KEY INTRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE whenstarting the vehicle.



To start the vehicle:



1. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket/insert.

2. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brakepedal and ENGINESTART/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

{ Warning

Never allow children to play withthe RKE transmitter. Thetransmitter contains a smallbattery, which can be a chokinghazard. If swallowed, internalburns can occur, resulting insevere injury or death. Seekmedical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury, do nottouch metal surfaces on the RKEtransmitter when it has beenexposed to extreme heat. Thesesurfaces can be hot to the touchat temperatures above 59 °C(138 °F).



Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

Caution

Always replace the battery withthe correct type. Replacing thebattery with an incorrect typecould potentially create a risk ofbattery explosion. Dispose ofused batteries according toinstructions and local laws. Donot attempt to burn, crush, or cutthe used battery, and avoidexposing the battery toenvironments with extremely lowair pressures or hightemperatures.

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY.

To replace the battery:

1. Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to remove the key.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

2. Insert a flat, thin object in thecenter of the transmitter toseparate and remove the backcover.



3. Lift the battery with a flatobject.

4. Remove the battery.

5. Insert the new battery, positiveside toward the back cover.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

6. Push together the transmitter.

7. Insert the key back into theRKE transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped with the remote startfeature, the climate control systemwill come on when the vehicle isstarted remotely, depending on theoutside temperature.

The rear defog and heated andventilated seats, if equipped, mayalso come on. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 60 andVehicle Personalization 0 156.

If equipped, the automatic heatedsteering wheel may also come on.See Heated Steering Wheel 0 119.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting ofvehicles.

Do not use remote start if thevehicle is low on fuel. The vehiclemay run out of fuel.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if:

. The RKE transmitter is insidethe vehicle or if the key is in theignition.

. The hood is not closed.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction and the lampis on.

. The ignition is in any mode otherthan off.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. Two remote starts or a remotestart with an extension havebeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

The engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if:

. The coolant temperature getstoo high.

. The oil pressure gets low.

The RKE transmitter range may bereduced while the vehicle is running.


Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.



The engine will continue to runfor 15 minutes. After30 seconds, repeatSteps 1 and 2 for a 15-minutetime extension.

Turn the ignition on to operate thevehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by 15 minutes, for a totalof 30 minutes, if during the first15 minutes Steps 1 and 2 arerepeated while the engine is stillrunning. An extension can berequested 30 seconds after starting.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off to useremote start again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and then off.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside:

. Use the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

. Use Keyless Access,if equipped.

. Use the key in the driver door orthe passenger door, if equipped.



From inside, use the power doorlocks or the manual door locks. Tolock the door with the manual doorlocks, push down on the manuallock knob.

From inside, pull the door handleonce to unlock the door. Pull thehandle again to open the door.


Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turnsfreely when either the wrong key isused, or the correct key is not fullyinserted. The free-turning door lockfeature prevents the lock from beingforced open. To reset the lock, turnit to the vertical position with thecorrect key fully inserted. Removethe key and insert it again. If thisdoes not reset the lock, turn the keyhalfway around in the cylinder andrepeat the reset procedure.

Power Door Locks

If equipped with power door locks.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingIf equipped, this feature delays thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after all doors areclosed.

Delayed locking can only be turnedon when the Open DoorAnti-Lockout feature has beenturned off.

When Q is pressed on the powerdoor lock switch while the door isopen, a chime will sound threetimes indicating delayed locking isactive.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors areclosed. If a door is reopened beforethat time, the five-second timer willreset when all doors are closedagain.

Press Q on the door lock switch

again or press Q on the RKEtransmitter to lock the doorsimmediately.

This feature can be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization 0 156.

Automatic Door LocksIf equipped, the doors will lockautomatically when all doors areclosed, the ignition is on, and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked, andthen opened and closed, the doorswill lock either when your foot is



removed from the brake or thevehicle speed becomes faster than13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Lockout ProtectionIf equipped, the ignition is on or inACC/ACCESSORY and the powerdoor lock switch is pressed with thedriver door open, all the doors willlock and only the driver door willunlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open,when all doors are closed thevehicle will check to the KeylessAccess function (if equipped). If anRKE transmitter is detected and thenumber of RKE transmitters inside

has not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes.

Lockout Protection can be manuallyoverridden with the driver door openby pressing and holding Q on thepower door lock switch.

Open Door Anti-Lockout

If equipped, the Open DoorAnti-Lockout is turned on and thevehicle is off, the driver door isopen, and locking is requested, allthe doors will lock and the driverdoor will unlock. The Open DoorAnti-Lockout feature can be turnedon or off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

The safety lock is on the insideedge of the rear doors. To use thesafety lock:

1. Move the lever down to thelock position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.



To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activatingthe inside handle, by pressingthe power door unlock switch,or by using the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

2. Open the door from theoutside.

When the safety lock is enabled,adults and older children will not beable to open the rear door from theinside. Cancel the safety locks toenable the doors to open from theinside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Move the lever up to unlock.Do the same for the other door.

Doors

Tailgate

Manual Tailgate

{ Warning

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgate caneasily lose their balance and fallin response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat beltproperly.

Use the key to unlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on itshandle while pulling thetailgate down.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches.

After closing the tailgate, pull it backto be sure it is latched securely.

Some tailgates have an electriclatch. If the battery is disconnectedor has low voltage, the tailgate willnot open. The tailgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected or recharged.

Power Release Tailgate

{ Warning

Make sure there is no one in theway of the power tailgate as it isopening and closing, and keephands away from the tailgatehinges when in use. You or otherscould be injured if caught in thepath of the power tailgate ortailgate hinges.

Caution

To avoid damage to the tailgate,make sure the area behind thetailgate is clear before opening it.



In the case of a dead battery, thetailgate can be opened manually.Contact your dealer or RoadsideAssistance.

If equipped, to lock or unlock thetailgate, use the RKE transmitter orthe key. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

The vehicle must be in P (Park).

To open the tailgate:

. Pressx twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the tailgatemoves.

. Press5 on the center stack.

. Press the touch pad on thetailgate handle after unlocking alldoors. Use the top of the tailgateto pull against if assistance isrequired. If equipped withKeyless Access, a lockedtailgate can be opened if theRKE transmitter is within1 m (3 ft).

To close the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches. Pull it backto be sure it is latched securely.

MultiPro Tailgate

{ Warning

Make sure there is no one in theway of the power tailgate as it isopening and closing, and keephands away from the tailgatehinges when in use. You or otherscould be injured if caught in thepath of the power tailgate ortailgate hinges.



Caution

To avoid damage to the tailgate,make sure the area behind thetailgate is clear before opening it.

If equipped with this feature, thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Switches in the inner tailgateprevent the primary tailgate frombeing opened when the innertailgate is not fully closed.

To open the primary tailgate:

. Pressx twice quickly on theRKE transmitter until the tailgatemoves. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation(Key Access) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (KeylessAccess) 0 16. If equipped withKeyless Access, the tailgate canbe opened if the RKE transmitteris within 1 m (3 ft).

. Press5 on the center stack.

. Press the lower touch pad onthe tailgate handle afterunlocking all doors. Use the topof the tailgate to pull against ifassistance is required.

To close the primary tailgate, firmlypush it upward until it latches. Pull itback to be sure it is latchedsecurely.



To open the inner tailgate, press theupper touch pad on the tailgatehandle after unlocking all doors. Pullthe top of the tailgate to open.

Caution

Do not open the inner tailgatewith the primary tailgate open ifthere is a hitch ball or trailerattached. This may damage thetailgate.

To close the inner tailgate with theprimary tailgate closed, firmly pushor pull it upward until it latches. Pullit back to be sure it is latchedsecurely.

To close the inner tailgate with theprimary tailgate open:

. Hold the primary tailgate andfirmly close the inner tailgate.

. Raise the inner tailgate so itmeets the primary tailgate andclose together at the same time.

When using the tailgate step as aload stop, the load must be securedas the load could shift. See CargoTie-Downs 0 115.

Tailgate Step

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury, keephands away from the hingeswhen operating the tailgate step.

With the primary and inner tailgatesopen, the tailgate step can belowered to access the pickup bed.

Using the Step

Caution

When using the tailgate as a step,the load rating is 170 kg (375 lb),which includes a person andcargo. Overloading the tailgatestep can cause damage to thetailgate system.



. To lower the tailgate step, pressthe button at the center of thestep. Make sure it lowers to thefully open position.

. To close the tailgate step, lift itfirmly. Make sure that both sidelatches are engaged.

Do not place a load on top of thestep when using it as a load stop.

Using the Assist Handle

The assist handle helps withentering the pickup box. To use:

1. Lift up on the handle until itlocks in the open position.

2. To return the assist handle, pullthe release lever toward theball end of the handle and pushthe handle back to the closedposition.

Applying Loads to Tailgates

Caution

Do not put ramp loads on theinner tailgate alone. Damage tothe inner tailgate may occur.



Preferred Method Alternate Method

When applying any load to thetailgate, distribute the weight evenlyacross the width of the tailgate. Thisapplies to all tailgate types.

. Use a load-distributingmember (1).

. Secure the ramp to thebumper (2).

Power Assist Steps

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury orproperty damage, before enteringor exiting the vehicle, be sure thepower assist step is fullyextended. Do not step on thepower assist step while it ismoving. Never place hands orother body parts between theextended power assist step andthe vehicle.

If equipped, the power assist steps,when enabled, will extend when thedoor is opened. They will retractthree seconds after the door isclosed or immediately if the vehiclestarts moving.

Keep hands, children, pets, objects,and clothing clear of the powerassist steps when in motion.

The steps will reverse direction ifthere is an obstruction. If possible,carefully remove the obstruction,then open and close the door on the



same side to complete the motion.If the obstruction is not cleared, theassist steps remain extended.

Slight movement of the steps whileextended is normal.

Kick Switch

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park)and unlock the doors.

2. Kick the switch to extend thepower assist step to the tire.A Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays.

3. Kick the switch again to returnto normal operation.

Center Stack Switch

The power assist steps can beextended to the tire by pressingj.

When extending the steps withj,the kick switch is disabled. Thevehicle must be in P (Park) orN (Neutral).

To extend the steps:

. Pressj to extend both steps.A DIC message displays.

. Pressj again to extend to thetire. A DIC message displays.

. Pressj again to return tonormal operation.

Enable/Disable

To enable or disable the powerassist steps, press and holdj forfour seconds. A DIC messagedisplays.

Cleaning

Clean the power assist stepsregularly. For an automatic carwash, extend the steps while inN (Neutral) using the center stackswitch. The steps will stow whenshifting into D (Drive).



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door or the hood is open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one oftwo ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds, the alarmsystem will arm and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp and

the lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door or the hood isopened without first disarming thesystem. When the alarm isactivated, the turn signals flash andthe horn sounds for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm bymistake:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have exited.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 37. Always unlock a door with the

RKE transmitter.

Unlocking the driver door withthe key will not disarm thesystem or turn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.

Steering Column LockIf equipped, the steering columnlock is a theft-deterrent device. Thisfeature locks the steering columnwhen the vehicle is turned off andthe driver door is opened, or whenthe driver door is opened and thenthe vehicle is turned off. Thesteering column unlocks when thevehicle is turned on.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)may display one of thesemessages:

. A message to service thesteering column lock indicatesthat an issue has been detectedwith the column lock feature andthe vehicle should be serviced.

. A message that the steeringcolumn is locked indicates thatthe engine is running, but thesteering column is still locked.It is normal for the column to belocked during a remote start, butthe column should unlock afterthe brake pedal is pressed andthe vehicle is started. Nomessage will display during aremote start.

. A message that the steeringwheel must be turned and thevehicle must be started againindicates that the column lockmechanism is bound, the columnlocking device was unable tounlock the steering column, andthe vehicle did not start. If thishappens, immediately turn thesteering wheel from side to side

to unbind the column lock. If thisdoes not unlock the steeringcolumn, turn the vehicle off andopen the driver door to reset thesystem. Then turn the vehicle onand immediately turn thesteering wheel side to side forabout 15 seconds. In somecases, it may take significantforce to unbind the column.

To keep the steering column frombinding, straighten the front wheelsbefore turning off the vehicle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 472.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.



The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the ignition is turnedfrom off to on.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedRKE transmitter will start thevehicle. If the transmitter is everdamaged, you may not be able tostart your vehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light may come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on. If theengine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off),and the RKE transmitter appears tobe undamaged, try anothertransmitter. Or, you may try placingthe transmitter in the transmitterpocket located in the centerconsole. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

If the ignition mode will not changewith the other transmitter or with thetransmitter in the transmitter pocket,your vehicle needs service. If theignition does change modes, thefirst transmitter may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew RKE transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementRKE transmitters. Up to eighttransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see "ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle" underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16

Do not leave the transmitter ordevice that disarms or deactivatesthe vehicle theft system in thevehicle.

When equipped with a key, if theengine still does not start, and thekey appears to be undamaged, tryanother ignition key. It may benecessary to check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers 0 370.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needs



service. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer. It is possible for theimmobilizer system to learn new orreplacement keys. Up to eight keyscan be programmed for the vehicle.To program additional keys, seeKeys (Key Access) 0 9 orKeys (Keyless Access) 0 12. Do notleave the key or device that disarmsor deactivates the vehicle theftsystem in the vehicle.

See your dealer to get a new keyblank cut exactly as the ignition keythat operates the system.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

Standard Mirrors

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

The upper portion of both the driverand passenger mirrors is flat.

The lower portion of both the driverand passenger mirrors is convex.A convex mirror’s surface is curvedso more can be seen from the driverseat. The lower portion is adjustedmanually.

Manual MirrorsIf equipped, adjust manual mirrorsby moving the mirror up and downor left to right to see a little of theside of the vehicle and to have aclear view behind the vehicle.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.



Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Extending Mirrors

Trailer tow mirrors can extend outfor better visibility when towing atrailer.

Manual Extend : If equipped, graspthe mirror housing firmly and pullback in one motion, arching slightlytoward the rear of the vehicle.

To return the mirror to its originalposition, reverse the motion.



Power Extend : If equipped, pressthe power extend button to fullyextend the mirror. Press again toretract.

Resetting the Power ExtendMirrors

Reset the power extend mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while extending/retracting.

. The mirrors are accidentallymanually extended/retracted.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

If a popping noise from the mirror isheard, this sound is normal as themanual detents are aligning after amanual extend/retract operation hasoccurred.

Auxiliary Cargo Mirror Lamps

If equipped, cargo mirror lamps facerearward to provide more light onthe sides of the vehicle, if needed.See Exterior Cargo Lamps 0 171.

Advanced Trailering VisionSystem Side Cameras

If equipped, the Advanced TraileringVision System side cameras are onthe bottom of the outside mirrors.See “Surround Vision (360Degrees)” under AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 257.

Power Mirrors

To adjust each mirror:

1. Pressj or| to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.The indicator light willilluminate.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen.

4. Pressj or| again todeselect the mirror.



Turn Signal Indicator

If equipped, the mirror has turnsignal indicator lights, which flash inthe direction of the turn or lanechange.

Task Lighting

If equipped, task lighting projectslight from the outside mirrors to thesides of the vehicle. See TaskLighting 0 171.

Puddle Lamps

If equipped, puddle lamps projectlight from the bottom of the mirror tothe area of ground below the driverand passenger doors. See EntryLighting 0 173 andExit Lighting 0 173.

Memory Mirrors

The vehicle may have memorymirrors. See Memory Seats 0 58.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)

The vehicle may have LCA. SeeLane Change Alert (LCA) 0 274.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

If equipped, push the mirror towardthe vehicle to fold. Push the mirroroutward to return to its originalposition.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Power Folding Mirrors

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Pressg to fold the mirrors into the folded position.

2. Pressg again to fold themirrors out to the drivingposition.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:

. The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

. The mirrors are accidentallymanually folded/unfolded.

. The mirrors will not stay in theunfolded position.

. The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Manually fold both mirrors if theyare out of sync. Fold and unfold themirrors three times using the mirrorcontrols to reset them to theirnormal position. A popping noisemay be heard. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.



Remote Mirror Folding

If equipped, press and hold Q onthe RKE transmitter forapproximately one second toremotely fold the exterior mirrors.Press and hold K on the RKEtransmitter for approximatelyone second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation (Key Access) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 156.

Heated MirrorsIf equipped with heated mirrors:

1 REAR : Press to heat theoutside mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem 0 179.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. Thisfeature comes on when the vehicleis started.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside mirror.It can show objects that may be inthe vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View



1. When the approaching vehicleis a long distance away, theimage in the main mirror issmall and near the inboardedge of the mirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitionsfrom the main mirror to theblind spot mirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appearsin the blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spot

mirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tiltsto a preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisallows the curb to be seen whenparallel parking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 156.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare fromthe headlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, the mirror willautomatically reduce the glare of theheadlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on eachtime the vehicle is started.



Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab to turn on the display.Push the tab to turn it off. When offthe mirror is automatic dimming.Adjust the mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle whilethe display is off.

Press V to scroll through theadjustment options.

Presst andu to adjust thesettings using the indicators on themirror. The indicators will remainvisible for five seconds after the lastbutton activation, and the settingswill remain saved.

The adjustment options are:

. Brightness

. Zoom



. Tilt

{ Warning

The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM)has a limited view. Portions of theroad, vehicles, and other objectsmay not be seen. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thiscamera. Objects may appearcloser than they are. Check theoutside mirrors or glance overyour shoulder when making lanechanges or merging. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Troubleshooting

See your dealer for service if a bluescreen and3 are displayed inthe mirror, and the display shuts off.Also, push the tab as indicated toreturn to the automaticdimming mode.

The Rear Camera Mirror may notwork properly or display a clearimage if:

. There is glare from the sun orheadlamps. This may obstructobjects from view. If needed,push the tab to turn off thedisplay.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 47. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocks

the camera lens. Clean the lenswith a soft damp cloth.

. The camera’s mounting on thevehicle has been damaged, and/or the position or the mountingangle of the camera haschanged.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Manual WindowsIf equipped, turn the hand crank oneach door to manually raise or lowerthe manual windows.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter or keys in avehicle with children. When thereare children in the rear seat, usethe window lockout button to

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

prevent operation of the windows.See Keys (Key Access) 0 9 orKeys (Keyless Access) 0 12.

The power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 216.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

With Power Folding Mirrors,Without Similar

This feature stops the rear doorpassenger window switches fromworking except from the driverposition.

Press2 to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on when engaged.

Press2 again to disengage.

Windows Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Pressthe switch down fully and quicklyrelease to express open thewindow.

If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release toexpress close the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Express Window Down

L: If equipped, this button will beon the center stack.

Press and holdL to open all

windows. ReleaseL to stop allmovement.

Use the power window switches toclose each window.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature willreverse window movement if itcomes in contact with an object.



Extreme cold or ice could cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow will operate normally afterthe object or condition is removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged.Before using automatic reversalsystem override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary ifthe vehicle battery has beendisconnected or discharged. If thewindow is unable to express-up,program each express-closewindow:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window hasfully closed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows thewindows to be opened remotely.If enabled in vehicle personalization,press and hold K on the RKEtransmitter. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Rear Windows

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned on or to ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 216.

. Press the switch to open thewindow.

. Pull the switch to close thewindow.



The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.

If equipped, there is a lighted mirroron the sun visor. Lift the coverto open.

Roof

Sunroof

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

If equipped, the sunroof operateswhen the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 216.

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Toexpress-open the sunroof,fully press and release I (1). Press

and release I (1) again to stop the

movement. To express-close thesunroof, fully press and releaseK (1). Press and releaseK (1)again to stop the movement.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) : Toopen the sunroof, press and hold I(1). Release I (1) to stop the

movement. Press and holdK (1)

to close the sunroof. ReleaseK (1) to stop the movement.

Tilt Switch

Vent : From the closed position,pressJ (2) to vent the sunroof.

PressK (2) to close the vent.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.



The sunroof also has a sunshade,which can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automaticreversal system that is only activewhen the sunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress-closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof slightly.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature byclosing the sunroof in manual mode.To stop movement, releaseK (1).

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunrooftracks.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.


52 Seats and Restraints

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 55Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 56Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 70

Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 73When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Passenger Sensing System . . . 77Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 82

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 83Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Infants and Young Children . . . . 86Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 88Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 90Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 91

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 104

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Securing Child Restraints (Inthe Center Front Seat) . . . . . . 107

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontOutboard Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108


Seats and Restraints 53

Head Restraints

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

To raise or lower the head restraint,press the button on the side of thehead restraint and pull up or pushthe head restraint down and releasethe button.

Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not removable.

Rear Head Restraints

The vehicle’s rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.



The head restraint can be foldedforward to allow for better visibilitywhen the rear seat is unoccupied.To fold the head restraint, press thebutton on the side of the headrestraint.

When an occupant is in the seat,always return the head restraint tothe upright position until it locks intoplace. Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91.

Center Headrest

The vehicle’s rear seat may beequipped with a headrest in thecenter seating position that cannotbe adjusted.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release thehandle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 56.

To adjust the lumbar support,if equipped, see Lumbar Adjustment0 56.

Center SeatIf equipped, the center frontseatback doubles as an armrest andcupholder/storage area for the driverand passenger when the centerfront seat is not used.

Pull the strap on the side of thecenter seatback to fold the centerseatback. Do not use the centerseatback as a seating position whenthe seatback is folded down.

To raise the seatback, push theseatback rearward until it locks inthe upright position. Push and pullon the seatback to make sure it islocked.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks 0 56.



To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 56.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems 0 255.

Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

To adjust the lumbar support,if equipped:

. Press and hold the controlforward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

The seatback will automaticallyfold forward.

2. To recline, move the seatbackrearward to the desiredposition, then release the leverto lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a power seatback,if equipped:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.



Memory Seats

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall theirunique seat positions for driving thevehicle, and a shared exit positionfor getting out of the vehicle. Otherfeature positions may also besaved, such as power mirrors,if equipped. Memory positions arelinked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2 forautomatic memory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn thevehicle on and then press andrelease SET; a beep will sound.Then immediately press and hold 1,

2, orB (Exit) until two beepssound. To manually recall thesepositions, press and hold 1, 2, orBuntil the saved position is reached.Follow the instructions under“Saving Memory Positions.”

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16. Only RKE transmitters 1 and 2can be used for automatic memoryrecalls. A Driver Information Center(DIC) welcome message indicatingthe transmitter number may displayfor the first few ignition cyclesfollowing a transmitter change. ForSeat Entry Memory to work properly,save the positions to the memorybutton (1 or 2) matching the RKEtransmitter number displayed in theDIC welcome message. Carry thelinked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Seat Entry Memorymovement begin when thevehicle is started, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Seating Position, and thenSeat Entry Memory. Select On orOff. See “Seat Entry Memory”later in this section.

. To begin Seat Exit Memorymovement when the vehicle isturned off and the driver door isopened, or when the vehicle isturned off with the driver dooralready opened, select theSettings menu, then Vehicle,then Seating Position, and thenSeat Exit Memory. Select On orOff. See “Seat Exit Memory”later in this section.

. See Vehicle Personalization0 156 for additional settinginformation.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Move your RKE transmitteraway from the vehicle.



2. Start the vehicle with anotherkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber for the other RKEtransmitter. Turn the vehicle offand remove the key or RKEtransmitter from the vehicle.

3. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. TheDIC should display the drivernumber of your RKEtransmitter.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:

1. Turn the vehicle on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

A DIC welcome message mayindicate driver number 1 or 2.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcomemessage until two beepssound.

If too much time passesbetween releasing SET andpressing 1, the memoryposition will not be saved andtwo beeps will not sound.Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” previously in thissection.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2. RKEtransmitters 3–8 will not savememory positions.

To save the position forB andSeat Exit Memory features, repeatSteps 1–4 usingB. This saves theposition for getting out of thevehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously saved memorypositions if you are driver 1 or 2identified in the DIC welcomemessage.

To stop Manual Memory recallmovement, release 1, 2, orB orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

Seat Entry Memory

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16. If the RKE transmitter is 1 or2, and Seat Entry Memory isenabled in vehicle personalization,the positions saved to the same



memory button number 1 or 2 areautomatically recalled when thevehicle is turned on, or turned fromoff to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKEtransmitters 3–8 will not provideautomatic memory recalls.

To turn Seat Entry Memory on or off,see “Vehicle PersonalizationSettings” previously in this sectionand Vehicle Personalization 0 156.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to start Seat Entry Memory. SeatEntry Memory recall will complete ifthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)prior to reaching the saved memoryposition.

To stop Seat Entry Memory recallmovement, turn the vehicle off orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB


If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall orrecalls to the wrong positions, thedriver’s RKE transmitter number

(1 or 2) may not match the memorybutton number that positions weresaved to. Try storing the position tothe other memory button or try theother RKE transmitter.

Seat Exit Memory

Seat Exit Memory is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position savedtoB is used for all drivers. To turnSeat Exit Memory on or off, see"Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section andVehicle Personalization 0 156.

If turned on, the position saved toB is automatically recalled whenone of the following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Seat Exit Memorymovement, press any of thefollowing memory controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB


Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction and try therecall again. If the memory positionstill does not recall, see your dealer.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, use carewhen using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater to

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

overheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated Seat

Buttons Similar

If equipped, the buttons are on thecenter stack. To operate, the enginemust be running.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press C or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh for an extended time, their levelmay automatically be lowered.

Auto Heated Seats

When the vehicle is on, this featurewill automatically activate theheated seats at the level required bythe vehicle’s interior temperature.The active high, medium, low, or offheated seat level will be indicatedby the manual heated seat buttonson the center stack. Use the manualheated seat buttons on the center

stack to turn auto heated seats off.If the passenger seat is unoccupied,the auto heated seats feature willnot activate that seat. The autoheated seats feature can beprogrammed to always be enabledwhen the vehicle is on. See VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Remote Start Heated andVentilated Seats

If equipped, the heated seats willturn on automatically during aremote start if it is cold outside andthe ventilated seats will turn onautomatically if it is hot outside.If equipped, the heated steeringwheel will turn on automaticallyduring a remote start if it is coldoutside. The heated and ventilatedseat indicators and heated steeringwheel indicator may not come onduring this operation.



The heated and ventilated seatsand heated steering wheel maycancel when the vehicle is started.These features can be manuallyselected after the ignition isturned on.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in vehiclepersonalization. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 25 andVehicle Personalization 0 156.

Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REARSEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REARSEAT displays under certainconditions indicating there may bean item or passenger in the rearseat. Check before exiting thevehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened whilethe vehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on.There will be an alert when thevehicle is turned off. The alert doesnot directly detect objects in the rearseat; instead, under certainconditions, it detects when a reardoor is opened and closed,indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rearseat; for example, if a child entered

the vehicle through the rear doorand left the vehicle without thevehicle being shut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 156.

Folding the Rear Seat Cushion

Either side of the rear seat cushioncan be folded up for added cargospace.

Caution

Folding a rear seat with the seatbelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the seatbelts. Always unbuckle the seatbelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Make sure that nothing is on theseat cushion.



To fold the seat, slowly pull the seatcushion up.

To return the seat to the normalseating position, slowly pull the seatcushion down.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

sure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

Heated Rear Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns.See the Warning under Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats 0 60.

If available, the buttons are on therear of the center console. Tooperate, the engine must berunning.

Press M or L to heat the left orright outboard seat cushion. Anindicator on the climate controldisplay appears when this featureis on.



This feature turns on at the highestsetting. With each press of thebutton, the heated seat changes tothe next lower setting, and then theoff setting. Three lights indicate thehighest setting, and one lightindicates the lowest. If the heatedseats are on high, the level mayautomatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 135.

Why Seat Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts— not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children 0 84 orInfants and Young Children 0 86.Review and follow the rules forchildren in addition to the followingrules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,



this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder beltto become loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.



Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.

{ Warning

The seat belt can be pinched if itis routed under plastic trim on theseat, such as trim around the rearseatback folding handle or sideairbag. In a crash, pinched seatbelts might not be able to provideadequate protection. Never allowseat belts to be routed underplastic trim pieces.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. See Child RestraintSystems 0 88. If this occurs, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again. If the locking



feature stays engaged afterletting the belt go back tostowed position on the seat,move the seat rearward orrecline the seat until theshoulder belt retractor lockreleases.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped. SeePassenger Sensing System0 77.

If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 70.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the seat belt assembly.They can help tighten the seat beltsduring the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioner

activation are met. Seat beltpretensioners can also help tightenthe seat belts in a side crash orrollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 71.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt,the comfort guide positions theshoulder belt away from the neckand head.

Comfort guides are availablethrough your dealer for the rearoutboard seating positions.Instructions are included with thecomfort guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For more

information on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep aseat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn, frayed, or twistedseat belts may not protect you in acrash. Torn or frayed seat belts canrip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, have itreplaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible tountwist by reversing the latch plateon the webbing. If the twist cannotbe corrected, ask your dealer tofix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 135.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 70.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.



{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems areworking properly after a crash,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 135.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.



For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback or side of theseat closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even with

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 75.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to, any

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 84 orInfants and Young Children 0 86.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 135.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Crew Cab Shown,Passenger Side Double and

Regular Cabs Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System 0 71.Airbags are designed to inflate if theimpact exceeds the specific airbagsystem's deployment threshold.Deployment thresholds are used topredict how severe a crash is likelyto be in time for the airbags toinflate and help restrain theoccupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.

A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills the



airbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 73.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of

full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 75.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize the airbagsinflated. Roof-rail airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated for sometime after they inflate. Somecomponents of the airbag modulemay be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbags, see WhereAre the Airbags? 0 73.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.



The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.The feature may also activate,without airbag inflation, after anevent that exceeds a predeterminedthreshold. After turning the ignitionoff and then on again, the fuelsystem will return to normaloperation; the doors can be locked,the interior lamps can be turned off,and the hazard warning flashers canbe turned off using the controls forthose features. If any of thesesystems are damaged in the crashthey may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 473andEvent Data Recorders 0 474.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.



United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 136.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand seat belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontal

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better to

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

secure child restraints in the rearseat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the childwhen a rear seat is not available.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:

. The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied.

. The system determines an infantis present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the OFF indicator will light and staylit as a reminder that the airbag isoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 136.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the ON indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints should

wear a seat belt properly—whetheror not there is an airbag for thatperson.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.



2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (Inthe Center Front Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontOutboard Seat) 0 108.

Make sure the seat beltretractor is locked by pullingthe shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor wheninstalling the child restraint,even if the child restraint isequipped with a seat belt lockoff. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightenedbut not pulled out of theretractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the ON indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatbackis not pushing the childrestraint into the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 53.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure child restraints in the rearseat. Consider using anothervehicle to transport the child when arear seat is not available. Never puta rear-facing child restraint in thefront seat, even if the ON indicatoris not lit.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the OFF indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:




2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such asblankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way,the child restraint lockingfeature will be engaged. Thismay unintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way,and then buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and havethe person remain in thisposition for two to three minutesafter the ON indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag OFF indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat duringvehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensingsystem maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Seat Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 82for more information aboutmodifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

seatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 471.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, or airbag wiring

. Front seats, including stitching,seams, or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrumentpanel, overhead console, ceilingtrim, or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag modules and sensors,sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on top



of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System0 77.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 401 for additionalimportant information.

If a snow plow is added to thevehicle, the airbags should still workproperly. The airbag systems weredesigned to work properly under awide range of conditions, includingsnow plowing with vehicles thathave the optional snow plow preppackage (RPO VYU). Do notchange or defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do, itcan damage the snow plow and thevehicle, and may cause an airbagdeployment.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices 0 464.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 135.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

covering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 73. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.



If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 135.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 67.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 67.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by

appropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate childrestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, thechild restraint will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The instruction manual that isprovided with the child restraintstates the weight and heightlimitations for that particular childrestraint. In addition, there are manykinds of child restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.



{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle seat beltmay not remain low on the hipbones, as it should. Instead, itmay settle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body areathat is unprotected by any bonystructure. This alone could causeserious or fatal injuries. To reducethe risk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, young childrenshould always be secured in anappropriate child restraint.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.



Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 84.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the following:

1. Instruction labels provided onthe child restraint

2. Instruction manual providedwith the child restraint

3. This vehicle owner's manual

The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seat



inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 77 for additional information.

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.




When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.



When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether.

For a forward-facing 5-pt harnesschild restraint where the combinedweight of the child and restraint areup to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either thelower LATCH anchorages with thetop tether anchorage, or the seatbelt with the top tether anchorage.Where the combined weight of thechild and restraint are greater than29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt withthe top tether anchorage only.



Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type CombinedWeight of theChild + ChildRestraint

Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X

LATCH – LowerAnchors Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – LowerAnchors and TopTether Anchor

Seat Belt andTop TetherAnchor

Rear-FacingChild Restraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Rear-FacingChild Restraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Up to29.5 kg (65 lb)

X X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint

Greater than29.5 kg (65 lb)

X

See Securing Child Restraints (Inthe Center Front Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front OutboardSeat) 0 108.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with top

tether where available) to securethe child restraint. See SecuringChild Restraints (In the Center FrontSeat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front OutboardSeat) 0 108.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Regular Cab — Bucket Seat Only



Regular Cab — Three-PassengerFront Seat

I : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter front seating position. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (In theCenter Front Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front OutboardSeat) 0 108 for more information.

Double and Crew Cab Rear Seat

I : Seating positions with toptether anchors.

H : Seating positions with twolower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors on double and crew cabmodels, each seating position with

lower anchors has two labels nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

For regular cab models, there aretop tether anchor symbols to assistyou in locating the top tetheranchors.

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter seating position. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (In theCenter Front Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front OutboardSeat) 0 108 for more information.



Regular Cab

For regular cab models, the toptether anchors are on the backpanel behind the passenger seat(s)or center seat. Be sure to use ananchor directly behind the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Driver Side Anchor and Loop(Double and Crew Cab)

Center Anchor and Loop (Doubleand Crew Cab)



Passenger Side Loop (Double andCrew Cab)

For double and crew cab models,the top tether is routed throughloops (2) to the top tetheranchors (1). Be sure to use thecorrect anchor for the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Be sure to read the followinginstructions to properly install a childrestraint using these loops andanchors.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requires

that the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 90 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor,except for the center top tetheranchors in the crew cab models.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

Do not fold the rear seat cushionwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 90.

Regular Cab Models

1. For models without a rear seat,forward-facing child restraintsshould only be installed in theright front seating position with

belts and a top tether. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (Inthe Center Front Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontOutboard Seat) 0 108.

If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if your vehicle has one. Referto the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

1.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

1.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:



If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the head restraint

and route the tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

2. Make sure the child restrainttop tether hook is completelyclosed and secured to the toptether anchor.

3. Secure the child restraint in theright front seating position withthe vehicle belts. See SecuringChild Restraints (In the CenterFront Seat) 0 107 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 104 orSecuring Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the FrontOutboard Seat) 0 108.

4. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for properinstallation.

Double and Crew Cab Models

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe seat belt. Refer to the childrestraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. For forward-facing childrestraints, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if your vehicle has one.Follow the child restraintinstructions and the vehicle



LATCH anchor weight limitsdescribed at the beginning ofthis section, and the followingsteps:

Rear Driver Side Position

Rear Driver Side Position

2.1. For a top tether in therear driver side position:

2.1.1. Remove the driverside head restraintand centerheadrest. See“Head Restraint orHeadrest Removaland Reinstallation”later in thissection.

2.1.2. For first time use,remove anddiscard the rubberband from the toptether loop (2).

2.1.3. Route the toptether (3) throughthe loop (2).

2.1.4. Attach the toptether (3) to thedriver side of thecenter top tethermetal anchor (1).



2.1.5. Make sure thechild restraint toptether hook iscompletely closedand secured to thetop tether anchor.

Rear Passenger Side Position

Rear Passenger Side Position

2.2. For a top tether in therear passenger sideposition:

2.2.1. Remove thepassenger sidehead restraint andcenter headrest.See “HeadRestraint orHeadrest Removaland Reinstallation”later in thissection.

2.2.2. Route the toptether (3) throughthe loop (2).

2.2.3. Attach the toptether (3) to thepassenger side ofthe center toptether metalanchor (1).




Rear Center Position

Rear Center Position

2.3. For a top tether in therear center position:

2.3.1. Remove the driverside head restraintand centerheadrest. See“Head Restraint orHeadrest Removaland Reinstallation”later in thissection.

2.3.2. Route the toptether (1) throughthe center loop (2).

2.3.3. Attach the toptether (1) to thedriver side toptether metalanchor (3).


3. Tighten the top tether per thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions.

When the top tether is properlytightened, the loop may bend.This is normal and will notdamage the vehicle.

If child restraints are installedin both outboard positions, bothtop tethers can be attached tothe center anchor. Top tetherscan be attached for childrestraints in all three rearseating positions at the sametime, following the routinginstructions above.

4. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.



Head Restraint or HeadrestRemoval and Reinstallation

The second row outboard headrestraints or center headrest can beremoved if they interfere with theproper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the second row headrestraints or center headrest:

1. Press both buttons on the headrestraint or headrest posts atthe same time, and pull up onthe head restraint or headrest.

2. Store the head restraint orheadrest in a secure place.

3. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint or headrest before theseating position is used.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To reinstall the head restraint orheadrest:

1. Insert the head restraint orheadrest posts into the holes inthe top of the seatback. Thenotches on the posts must facethe driver side of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint orheadrest down.

3. Try to move the head restraintor headrest to make sure that itis locked in place.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a seat belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 91 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 90.

Double Cab

1. Remove the head restraint orheadrest prior to installing aforward-facing child restraint inan outboard rear seatingposition. See “Head Restraintor Headrest Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 91.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.



3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle seat belt throughor around the child restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. For forward-facing childrestraints, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (loop). Refer to the childrestraint instructions, thevehicle LATCH anchor weightlimits, and instructions listed inLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 91.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.Reinstall the head restraint orheadrest before the seating positionis used. See “Head Restraint orHeadrest Removal and

Reinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91 for additionalinformation on installing theheadrest properly.

Crew Cab










6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91 for moreinformation on using the toptether anchors.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

For outboard rear seating positions,if the child restraint cannot beinstalled properly with the headrestraint in place, the head restraint

may be removed. See your dealerfor assistance with removal, andstore the removed head restraint ina secure place. When the childrestraint is removed, reinstall thehead restraint before the seatingposition is used. For reinstallationinstructions, see “Head Restraint orHeadrest Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91.

Securing Child Restraints(In the Center Front Seat)

{ Warning

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.



Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Outboard Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 90.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 77andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 136 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

forward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System0 77 for additional information.


If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 91 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if



the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the OFF indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay

lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 136.



Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.








7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor,attach the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with thechild restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 91.


If the airbag is off, the OFF indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.



If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 77.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


112 Storage

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 112Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . 113Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Center Console Storage . . . . . . 113Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 114

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove Box

To access the upper glove box, pullup on the handle.

To access the lower glove box,unlock with the key and pull downon the handle.

Cupholders

Front

There may be cupholders on thecenter front seat console armrest.

Rear

If equipped, pull the rear seatarmrest down to access thecupholders.


Storage 113

Underseat Storage

There may be storage under therear passenger seat. Lift up on theseat bench to access. Push the seatbench toward the floor to close.

Rear Storage

There may be storage in the rearseat. Pull the tab to access.

Push the storage door to close. Thestorage door must be closed beforeinstalling child restraints.

Center Console Storage

Bench Seat

Pull the strap on the side of thecenter seatback to access thestorage area and cupholders. Donot use the center seatback as aseating position when the seatbackis folded down.

To raise the seatback, push theseatback rearward until it locks inthe upright position. Push and pullon the seatback to make sure it islocked.


114 Storage

Bench Seat

If equipped with storage, press thelatch and lift to open.

Bucket Seat

Press the latch and lift to open.

Floor Console Storage

If equipped with front center seatstorage, unlock with the ignition key,press the latch, and lift to open.


Storage 115

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

Caution

The truck bed walls will collapse ifthe tie-downs are overloaded.

Standard and Long Box

This vehicle is equipped with 12fixed cargo tie-downs.

Any of the 12 locations inside thetruck bed can be used. Themaximum load per corner is 227 kg(500 lb).

CarbonPro Box

Accessory Tie-Downs

Additional Accessory Tie-DownPoints

Any of the nine holes inside thetruck bed can be used for tie-downs.

The maximum load is 113 kg(250 lb) per tie-down.

Caution

The truck bed walls will collapse ifthe tie-downs are overloaded.


116 Storage

To install:

1. Insert a tie-down loopassembly until it is flush withthe truck bed wall.

2. Turn the tie-down loopclockwise to tighten. Thetie-down will be hard to turnuntil the toggle moves past theinstallation point on the toggleguide.

3. Fasten the tie-down firmly byhand only. Do not use tools.

To remove:

1. Remove the tie-down loopcompletely by turningcounterclockwise whileholding the backing plateagainst the truck bed wall.

2. Pull the backing plate awayfrom the truck bed wall until aclick is heard. This locks thetoggle into position on thetoggle guide.

3. Push the backing plate againstthe truck bed wall. This allowsthe toggle nut to spin.

4. Remove the backing plate,toggle guide, and toggle nutfrom the truck bed wallcompletely.

5. Reinstall the tie-down loopthrough the backing plate intothe toggle nut for reuse.


Instruments and Controls 117

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 118Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 119Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 119Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 119Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 135Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 135Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 137Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 137

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . 141Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 141Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 141Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light (2500/3500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light(1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 142Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . 142Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic Stability ControlLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Driver Mode Control Light . . . . 144Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 144Engine Oil Pressure Light(Uplevel Cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 145Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 146Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . 146Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 146Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 146Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Driver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) . . . . . . 148

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . 152

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Engine Power Messages . . . . . 155Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 156

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 156


118 Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . 161Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Tilt and Telescoping Wheel

To adjust the tilt and telescopingsteering wheel, if equipped:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainmentmanual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped, press to turn it on oroff. A light next to the buttondisplays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Remote Start Heated SteeringWheel

If equipped with remote start, theheated steering wheel will turn onautomatically during a remote startalong with the heated seats when itis cold outside. The heated steeringwheel indicator light may notcome on.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats 0 60.

Horn

To sound the horn, pressa on thesteering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withN on it.

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, turn theN band toselect the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

3 : Turn the band up for morefrequent intermittent wipes or downfor less frequent intermittent wipes.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1x : For a single wipe, briefly turntheN band down. For several

wipes, hold the band down.

L : PressL on the windshieldwiper control to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

The wipers will continue untilL is

released or the maximum wash time

is reached. WhenL is released,

additional wipes may occur



depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid 0 354for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 364.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

{ Warning

Before driving the vehicle, alwaysclear snow and ice from the hood,windshield, roof, and rear of thevehicle, including all lamps andwindows. Reduced visibility fromsnow and ice buildup could leadto a crash.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are on LO, HI, or3, theywill immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper control is ONthen moved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, ElectronicStability Control (ESC), and vehiclespeed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again.

ClockThe time and date for the clock canbe set using the infotainmentsystem. See “Time/Date” in“System” under “Settings” in theinfotainment manual.



Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

Rear of Front Center Console

The vehicle has one accessorypower outlet under the climatecontrol system and one accessorypower outlet on the rear of thecenter console, if equipped, or onthe rear of the bench seat,if equipped.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 322.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120-VoltAlternating Current

If equipped, the vehicle has twoalternating current power outlets.



In Cab Power Outlet and DC/ACSwitch

Truck Bed Power Outlet

When the ignition is on, power issupplied to the outlets after the DC/AC switch is pressed. A greenindicator light on the DC/AC switchindicates when the DC/AC operationis active. One power outlet can beused with electrical equipment thatuses a maximum of 400 watts.If both outlets are being used, 400watts will be shared between theoutlets. Ensure that all connecteddevices do not exceed 400 watts.

The power outlet can be turned offby pressing the DC/AC switch. Thepower outlet can be turned back onafter 10 seconds, during which theindicator light on the switch willflash.

An indicator light on the outletilluminates when power is providedto the outlet and no system fault isdetected. The outlets will notoperate when the ignition is off, theDC/AC switch is not pressed, or theplug is not fully seated into theoutlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 400 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off.

Do not use a power outlet with amissing or damaged cover.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Wireless ChargingThe vehicle may have wirelesscharging on the center console infront of the cupholders. The systemoperates at 145 kHz and wirelessly



charges one Qi compatiblesmartphone. The power output ofthe system is capable of charging ata rate up to 3 amp (19.5W) asrequested by the compatiblesmartphone. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 472.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medicaldevices. If you have one, it isrecommended to consult withyour doctor before using thewireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. The wireless chargingfeature may not correctly indicatecharging when the vehicle is in RAP.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 216.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the smartphone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before chargingyour compatible smartphone.Objects, such as coins, keys,rings, paper clips, or cards,between the smartphone andcharging pad will become veryhot. On the rare occasion that thecharging system does not detectan object, and the object getswedged between the smartphoneand charger, remove thesmartphone and allow the objectto cool before removing it fromthe charging pad, to preventburns.

To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between thesmartphone and charging pad.

2. Place the smartphone face upon the@ symbol on thecharging pad.

To maximize the charge rate,ensure the smartphone is fullyseated and centered in theholder with nothing under it.A thick smartphone case mayprevent the wireless chargerfrom working, or may reduce



the charging performance. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.

3. A green} will appear on theV on the infotainment display.This indicates that thesmartphone is properlypositioned and charging. If asmartphone is placed on thecharging pad and} does notdisplay, remove thesmartphone from the pad, turnit 180 degrees, and waitthree seconds before placing/aligning the smartphone on thepad again.

4. If} turns yellow, ensure thatthe charging pad is clear of anyobjects and that thesmartphone is capable ofwireless charging beforere-positioning it. If} does notilluminate, the smartphone mayneed to re-positioned.

The smartphone may becomewarm during charging. This isnormal. In warmertemperatures, the speed ofcharging may be reduced.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer tothe indicated open source licenses(as are included following thisnotice) for the terms and conditionsof their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, pleasevisit http://opensource.lge.com. Inaddition to the source code, allreferred license terms, warrantydisclaimers and copyright noticesare available for download. LGElectronics will also provide opensource code to you on CD-ROM fora charge covering the cost ofperforming such distribution (suchas the cost of media, shipping, andhandling) upon email request to

[email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from thedate on which you purchased theproduct.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditionsand the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in thedocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.



THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDEDBY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERSAND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDEROR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OFSUBSTITUTE GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,

OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER INCONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OFTHE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

1500 Series Base Cluster English Shown, 2500/3500 Series and Metric Similar



Midlevel Cluster English Shown, Metric Similar



1500 Series Uplevel Cluster English Standard Shown, 2500/3500 Series and Metric Similar



Cluster Menu (Midlevel andUplevel)

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press S or T to access the clusterapplications. Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the list of availablefeatures. Press the thumbwheel toselect. Not all applications will beavailable on all vehicles.

. Home

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See “Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Uplevel)” in theIndex.

. Audio

. Navigation

. Phone

. Options

Home

Information displayed here can becustomized from the Options menu.

Speedometer : Displays how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph).

Speed Sign : Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation, if equipped.

Time : Displays the current time.

Fuel Range : Displays theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling. Thefuel range estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. Fuel range cannot bereset.

Audio

In the Audio menu, use thethumbwheel to scroll throughoptions, browse for music, selectfrom favorites, or change the audiosource. In the main view, scroll tochange the station or go to the nextor previous track.

Navigation

In the Navigation menu, if there isno active route, a compass will bedisplayed. If there is an active route,press the thumbwheel to cancel orresume route guidance, mute orunmute voice guidance, or accessRecents or Favorites.



Phone

In the Phone menu, if there is noactive phone call, view recent calls,scroll through contacts, select fromthe favorites, or change the phonesource. If there is an active call,mute the phone or switch to handsetoperation.

Options

Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough items in the Options menu.

Head-up Display (HUD) :If equipped, this feature allows foradjusting the angle of the HUDimage and changing or turning offthe Speed Limit Sign.

HUD Rotation: Press thethumbwheel while Adjust Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Scroll to adjust the angle of theHUD display. Press the thumbwheelto confirm and save the setting. Thisfeature may only be available inP (Park).

Speed Limit: Press the thumbwheelwhile Speed Limit is highlighted toturn it on or off.

Speed Limit Style: Press thethumbwheel while Speed Limit Styleis highlighted to change the speedsign style.

Units : Press the thumbwheel whileUnits is displayed to enter the Unitsmenu. Choose US or metric units bypressing the thumbwheel while thedesired item is highlighted.A selected mark will be displayednext to the selected item.

Info Page Options : Press thethumbwheel while Info PageOptions is displayed to enter andselect the items to be displayed inthe Info app. A selected mark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Home : Press the thumbwheel toselect the available elements todisplay. Not all elements will beavailable on all vehicles:Speedometer, Speed Sign, Time,and Fuel Range.

Display (Uplevel) : Press thethumbwheel to enter the Displaymenu. Select to turn on or off thecompass or speed sign.

Speed Warning : The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press the thumbwheel when SpeedWarning is displayed, or press thethumbwheel on the main view to setthe speed value. Scroll to adjust thevalue. Press the thumbwheel to setthe speed. Once the speed is set,this feature can be turned off bypressing the thumbwheel whileviewing this page. If the selectedspeed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed with a chime.

Software Information : Press thethumbwheel while SoftwareInformation is highlighted to displayopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).



OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

For vehicles with the Stop/Startsystem, when the ignition is on, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTOSTOP, the engine is off but thevehicle is on and can move. Theengine could auto start at any time.When the indicator points to OFF,the vehicle is off.

When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during Auto Stopmode, when the engine is shuttingoff and restarting.

Fuel Gauge

Midlevel Metric Fuel GaugeShown, Base Level and Uplevel

Fuel Gauge Similar



Midlevel English Fuel GaugeShown, Base Level and Uplevel

Fuel Gauge Similar

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Midlevel Metric Shown, Base Leveland Uplevel Similar



Midlevel English Shown, BaseLevel and Uplevel Similar

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature, coolanttemperature, and oil viscosity.

On some models, the oil pump willvary engine oil pressure accordingto engine needs. Oil pressure maychange quickly as the engine speedor load varies. This is normal. If theoil pressure warning light or Driver

Information Center (DIC) messageindicates oil pressure outside thenormal operating range, check thevehicle's oil as soon as possible.

See Engine Oil 0 339.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Midlevel Metric Shown, Base Leveland Uplevel Similar



Midlevel English Shown, BaseLevel and Uplevel Similar

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

Voltmeter Gauge

Midlevel Shown, Base Level andUplevel Similar

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light 0 137.

The voltmeter gauge may also readlower when in fuel economy mode.This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.



Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There may be a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System 0 77.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger seat belt reminder light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirseat belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger seat belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger seat beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 71.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System 0 77 for important

safety information. The overheadconsole has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or offsymbol, to let you know the status ofthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced right

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 135 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is onand the engine is not running. SeeIgnition Positions (Keyless Access)0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 329.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.

If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow theprevious guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless funneladapter, make sure that it hasbeen removed. See “Filling theTank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank (PickupModel) 0 283 orFilling the Tank (Chassis CabModel) 0 285. The diagnosticsystem can detect if the adapterhas been left installed in thevehicle, allowing fuel to

evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed may turn offthe light.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. SeeRecommended Fuel (Except6.2L V8 Engine) 0 280 orRecommended Fuel (6.2LV8 Engine) 0 281.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 322. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is on while theengine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine driving

before the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLight

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the vehicle is turned on. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on and stays on atstart up, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedright away.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.If equipped with electric brakeboost, vehicle speed may be limitedwhen the brake system warninglight comes on. The brake pedalmight be harder to push, or thebrake pedal may go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 424.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when theparking brake is applied. If the lightcontinues flashing after the parkingbrake is released, or while driving,there is a problem with the ElectricParking Brake system. A messagemay also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

This light should come on brieflywhen starting the vehicle. If it doesnot come on, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If this light stays on, take the vehicleto your dealer as soon as possible.See the information for the ElectricParking Brake under ElectricParking Brake 0 233. A messagemay also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light should come onbriefly when the vehicle is turnedon. If the light does not come on,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,safely stop as soon as it is possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then turnon the vehicle again to reset thesystem.

If the ABS warning light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light stays on.

If the ABS warning light is the onlylight on, the vehicle has regularbrakes, but ABS is not functioning.



If both the ABS warning light andthe brake system warning light areon, ABS is not functioning and thereis a problem with the regular brakes.See your dealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 139.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

Auto Mode Shown, Other ModesSimilar

If equipped, the four-wheel-drivelight displays what mode the vehicleis in. The light will show each mode:2WD, 4HI, AUTO (all transfercases); 4LOW and N (two-speedtransfer case only).

The light will flash when a shift is inprogress. Once the shift is completethe light will be steady.

If the light turns amber, there maybe a malfunction with thefour-wheel-drive system. See yourdealer.

See Four-Wheel Drive 0 227.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 227.

Hill Descent Control Light

If equipped, the Hill Descent Controllight comes on when the system isready for use. When the lightflashes, the system is active.

See Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 237.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light (2500/3500Series)

If equipped, this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced.

This light is green if LDW is on andready to operate.

This light changes to amber andflashes to indicate that the lanemarking has been crossed withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.



See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)(2500/3500 Series) 0 276.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light (1500 Series)

After the vehicle is started, this lightturns off and stays off if LKA has notbeen turned on or is unavailable.

If available, this light is white if LKAis turned on, but not ready to assist.This light is green if LKA is turnedon and is ready to assist.

LKA may assist by gently turningthe steering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lanemarking. The LKA light is amberwhen assisting.

This light flashes amber as a LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) alert, toindicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

LKA will not assist or alert if the turnsignal is active in the direction oflane departure, or if LKA detectsthat you are accelerating, braking,or actively steering.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500Series) 0 278.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay green when a vehicle isdetected ahead and amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 268.

Pedestrian AheadIndicator

If equipped, this indicator willdisplay amber when a nearbypedestrian is detected in front of thevehicle.

See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System (1500 Series) 0 272.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by your



dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/ESC button.

This light and the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) OFF light come onwhen ESC is turned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 235.

Traction Control System(TCS)/Electronic StabilityControl Light

If equipped, the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) or TCS indicator/warning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the ESCsystem have been disabled.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theESC system is actively working.


Trailer Sway Control Light(Uplevel Cluster)

This light will flash when TrailerSway Control is active. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 308.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when the ESCsystem is turned off. If ESC is off,the Traction Control System (TCS)is also off.

If the ESC and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS andthe ESC systems and the warninglight turns off.




Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating 0 351.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating 0 351.

Driver Mode Control Light

This light comes on when SportMode is selected (1500 Series).

This light comes on when Snow/IceMode is selected.

This light comes on when TerrainMode is selected (1500 Series).

This light comes on when Off-RoadMode is selected.

Tire Pressure Light



For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 387.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 390.

Engine Oil Pressure Light(Uplevel Cluster)

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 37.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 167.

IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior LampControls 0 165.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps 0 170.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use, exceptwhen only the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) are active. SeeExterior Lamp Controls 0 165.

Cruise Control Light



For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl 0 243.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Base Level)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster. Thedisplays show the status of manyvehicle systems. The trip odometerreset stem in the instrument clusteris used to access the DIC menuitems.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

DIC Menu Items

Turn the trip odometer reset stem toscroll through the following menuitems:

. Digital Speedometer

. Trip 1/2

. Fuel Range

. Tire Pressure

. Remaining Oil Life

. Air Filter Life

. Brake Pad Life

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 or 2 and Average FuelEconomy

Turn the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP 1 or TRIP 2 displays. Thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer isshown, as well as the average fueleconomy. The trip odometer and theaverage fuel economy can be resetby pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy over



recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Tire Pressure

Turn the trip odometer reset stemuntil a vehicle with the approximatepressures of all four tires displays.Tire pressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi).

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 389 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 390.

Remaining Oil Life

Turn the trip odometer reset stemuntil REMAINING OIL LIFEdisplays. An estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life is shown.REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% means99% of the current oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 339.In addition to the engine oil life

system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 441.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not reset the Oil Lifedisplay at any time other than whenthe oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System 0 341.

Air Filter Life

Turn the trip odometer reset stemuntil AIR FILTER LIFE displays.This displays an estimate of theengine air filter’s remaining usefullife and the state of the system.Engine Air Filter Life 95% means95% of the current air filter liferemains. Messages will displaybased on the engine air filter life andthe state of the system.

When the REPLACE AT NEXT OILCHANGE message displays, theengine air filter should be replacedat the time of the next oil change.

When the REPLACE SOONmessage displays, the engine airfilter should be replaced at theearliest convenience.

The Air Filter Life display must bereset after the engine air filterreplacement. To reset, see EngineAir Filter Life System 0 343.

Brake Pad Life

This displays an estimate of theremaining life of the front and rearbrake pads. Messages will displaybased on brake pad wear and thestate of the system. Reset the BrakePad Life display after replacing thebrake pads. See Brake Pad LifeSystem 0 356.

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Midlevel andUplevel)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info app. See Instrument Cluster0 126. The displays show the statusof many vehicle systems.




S or T : Press to move left or rightbetween the interactive displayzones in the cluster. Press thethumbwheel to select.

y orz : Use the thumbwheel toscroll up or down in a list. Press thethumbwheel to select.

Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press T to scroll to theOptions application.

2. Scrolly orz to choose Infopages and press thethumbwheel.

3. Scrolly orz to movethrough the list of possibleinformation displays.

4. Press the thumbwheel while anitem is highlighted to select ordeselect that item.

The info pages can also be turnedon or off through the DIC page InfoPage Options.

Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Optionsapp. See “Info Page Options” earlierin this section.

While in the Info Page Optionsmenu, the info pages can berestored to the default factory

settings by pressing and holdingKon the left steering wheel controlsand the thumbwheel on the rightsteering wheel controls at thesame time.

Speed : Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown on thispage. If equipped, press thethumbwheel to open the menu andselect to display speed limit signs.

Speed limit signs in your vehicledisplay may vary from actual roadspeed depending on the version ofyour current navigation map.

Trip 1 or Trip 2, and Average FuelEconomy : Shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu item



was reset. This number reflects onlythe approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change.

Press the thumbwheel while thisdisplay is active to reset the tripodometer and the average fueleconomy.

Fuel Range : Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on anaverage of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Timer : This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, press thethumbwheel while this display isactive. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset. Tostop the timer, press thethumbwheel briefly while this displayis active and the timer is running.

Press the thumbwheel while thisdisplay is active to reset the timer.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 339.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 441.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not reset the Oil Lifedisplay at any time other than whenthe oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press thethumbwheel while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System 0 341.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System 0 389 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 390.

Air Filter Life : Shows an estimateof the engine air filter’s remaininguseful life and the state of thesystem. Engine Air Filter Life 95%means 95% of the current air filterlife remains. Messages will displaybased on the engine air filter life andthe state of the system. When theREPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGEmessage displays, the engine airfilter should be replaced at the timeof the next oil change. When theREPLACE SOON messagedisplays, the engine air filter shouldbe replaced at the earliestconvenience.



The Air Filter Life display must bereset after the engine air filterreplacement. To reset, see EngineAir Filter Life System 0 343.

Brake Pad Life : This displays anestimate of the remaining life of thefront and rear brake pads.Messages will display based onbrake pad wear and the state of thesystem. Reset the Brake Pad Lifedisplay after replacing the brakepads. See Brake Pad Life System0 356.

Fuel Economy : Displays averagefuel economy, the best fueleconomy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press the thumbwheel to changethe selected distance. Press andhold the thumbwheel while thisdisplay is active to reset the bestfuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Engine Hours (Hourmeter) :Shows the total number of hours theengine has run. This display alsoshows the engine idle hours.

Transmission FluidTemperature : Shows thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Trailer Brake : On vehicles with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, the trailer brakedisplay appears in the DIC.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

TRAILER OUTPUT shows thepower output to the trailer any timea trailer with electric brakes isconnected. Output is displayed as abar graph. Dotted lines may appearin the OUTPUT display if a trailer isnot connected.

Off Road : Displays vehicle pitchand roll information, road wheelangle, and four-wheel drive (4WD)status.

Follow Distance : If equipped, thecurrent follow time to the vehicleahead is displayed as a time valueon this page.

Driver Assistance : If equipped,shows information for Lane KeepAssist (LKA) and Forward CollisionAlert (FCA).

Info Page Options : Scroll tochoose which info pages appear onthe DIC. Press the thumbwheel toselect or deselect.

Blank Page : Shows noinformation.



Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation about the operation ofthe vehicle is projected onto thewindshield. The image is projectedthrough the HUD lens on top of theinstrument panel. The informationappears as an image focused outtoward the front of the vehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD imageas a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection is changedthrough the radio, and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe instrument cluster. See“Settings” in the infotainmentmanual and “Options” underInstrument Cluster 0 126.

HUD Display on the Windshield

Depending on how the vehicle isequipped, the HUD may displaysome of the following vehicleinformation and vehicle messagesor alerts:

. Speed

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Driver Assistance Features

. Vehicle Messages



Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may becleared by using the steering wheelcontrols.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press or pull to center theHUD image. The HUD image canonly be adjusted up and down, notside to side.

! : Press to select the displayview. Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Pull and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press and hold to dim thedisplay. Continue to hold to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. UseD to adjust

as needed.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Head-Up Display (HUD) RotationOption

If equipped, this feature under theOptions menu of the instrumentcluster allows for adjusting the angleof the HUD image and changing orturning off the Speed Limit Sign.

HUD Rotation: Press thethumbwheel while Adjust Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.Scroll to adjust the angle of theHUD display. Press the thumbwheelto confirm and save the setting. Thisfeature may only be available inP (Park).

Speed Limit Style Adjustment

If equipped, the speed limit stylecan be changed to a speed limit baror speed limit sign from the Optionsmenu in the instrument cluster.Press the thumbwheel while SpeedLimit Style is highlighted to changethe speed sign style or to turn it off.

HUD Views

There are four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information andvehicle messages or alerts may bedisplayed in any view.



English Shown, Metric Similar

Speed View : This displays thespeedometer reading in English ormetric units, and speed limit. Someinformation only appears onvehicles that have these features,and when they are active.


Active Safety View : This displaysthe speed view along with a driverassistance graphic on the left.

Driver assistance graphics showyour vehicle, vehicle ahead, gapsetting, and lane status information.In addition to driver assistancegraphics, pedestrian advisory andtrailer sway indicators will bedisplayed.


Navigation/Active OnStar View :This displays the speed view alongwith indicators for vehicle ahead,Lane Departure Warning/Lane KeepAssist, trailer sway, and pedestrianadvisory. Turn-by-Turn navigationinformation is shown during activeroute. The compass heading isdisplayed when navigation routing isnot active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.


Off Road View : This displays thespeed view along with indicators forvehicle ahead, Lane DepartureWarning/Lane Keep Assist, trailersway, four-wheel drive status, andpedestrian advisory. Off-roadinformation such as pitch angle,steering angle, and rolling angle isalso shown.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity ofthe HUD image.



Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipethe lens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

Check that:

. Nothing is covering theHUD lens.

. The HUD brightness setting isnot too dim or too bright.

. The HUD is adjusted to theproper height.

. Polarized sunglasses arenot worn.

. The windshield and HUD lensare clean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. See WindshieldReplacement 0 365.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) indicatethe status of the vehicle or someaction that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing the thumbwheel. Themessages that require immediateaction cannot be cleared until thataction is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Steering

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. A reduction in propulsionpower can affect the vehicle's abilityto accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no observed reduction



in performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Under certain operating conditions,propulsion will be disabled. Tryrestarting after the vehicle has beenoff for 30 seconds.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal, brakes,suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.

VehiclePersonalizationThe following are all possiblevehicle personalization features.Depending on the vehicle, somemay not be available.

For System, Apps, and Personalfeatures and functions, see“Settings” in the infotainmentmanual.

To access the vehiclepersonalization menu:

1. Touch the Settings icon on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

2. Touch Vehicle to display a listof available options.

3. Touch to select the desiredfeature setting.

4. Touch9 or R to turn a featureoff or on.

5. Touch z to go to the top levelof the Settings menu.

The menu may contain thefollowing:

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and amessage when the rear door hasbeen opened before or duringoperation of the vehicle.

Touch Off or On.

Climate and Air Quality

Touch and the following maydisplay:

. Auto Fan Speed

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This setting specifies the amount ofairflow when the climate control fansetting is Auto Fan.

Touch Low, Medium, or High.

Auto Defog

This setting automatically directs airto the windshield to assist indefogging, based on temperatureand humidity conditions.



Touch Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

This setting automatically turns therear defogger on based ontemperature and humidityconditions.

Touch Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems


. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Front Pedestrian Detection

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Lane Change Alert

. Park Assist

. Rear Camera Park AssistSymbols

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Alert Type

This feature sets the type of alertfrom the driver assistance systemsto help avoid crashes.

Touch Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This setting controls the vehicleresponse when detecting a vehicleahead of you. The Off settingdisables all FCA and AEB functions.With the Alert and Brake setting,both FCA and AEB are available.The Alert setting disables AEB. SeeAutomatic Emergency Braking(AEB) 0 270.

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Front Pedestrian Detection

This feature may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes with nearbypedestrians. See Front PedestrianBraking (FPB) System (1500 Series)0 272.

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This setting determines if an alertwill appear when Adaptive CruiseControl brings the vehicle to acomplete stop and the vehicle

ahead of you starts moving again.See Adaptive Cruise Control (1500Series) 0 245.

Touch Off or On.

Lane Change Alert

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Lane Change Alert(LCA) 0 274.

Touch Off or On.

Park Assist

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Assistance Systemsfor Parking or Backing 0 257.

Select Off, On, or On with Towbar.

Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols

This setting enables the RearCamera Park Assist Symbols. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 257.

Touch Off or On.



Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This allows the Rear Cross TrafficAlert feature to be turned on or off.See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 257.

Touch Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Remote Mirror Folding

Chime Volume

This determines the chime volumelevel.

Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to adjust thevolume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off. See Reverse Tilt Mirrors0 44.

Touch Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Remote Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willremotely fold or unfold when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K button ispressed and held. See FoldingMirrors 0 42.

Touch Off or On.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This setting flashes the vehicle’sheadlamps when K is pressed onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Touch Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This setting specifies how long theheadlamps stay on after the vehicleis turned off and exited.

Touch Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks


. Open Door Anti Lock Out

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out

This setting prevents the driver doorfrom locking when the door is open.If this setting is on, the DelayedDoor Lock menu will not beavailable.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This setting allows selection ofwhich doors will automaticallyunlock when the vehicle is shiftedinto P (Park).



Touch Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

This setting delays the locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

This setting flashes the exteriorlamps when the vehicle is unlockedwith the RKE transmitter.

Touch Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This setting specifies how thevehicle responds when the vehicleis locked with the RKE transmitter.

Touch Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This setting specifies whether alldoors, or just the driver door, unlockwhen pressing K on the RKEtransmitter.

Touch All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn on the ventilatedseats when using remote start onwarm days. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 60 andRemote Vehicle Start 0 25.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn on the heated seatswhen using remote start on

cold days. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 60 andRemote Vehicle Start 0 25.

If equipped with Auto HeatedSteering Wheel, this feature will turnon when the Remote Start AutoHeated Seats turn on.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature enablesremote operation of the windowswith the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

Touch Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Touch Off, All Doors, or DriverDoor Only.



Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation (KeyAccess) 0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

Touch Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle. This menu also enablesRemote No Longer In Vehicle Alert.

Touch Off or On.

Seating Position


. Seat Entry Memory

. Seat Exit Memory

Seat Entry Memory

This feature automatically recallsthe previously stored 1 or 2 buttonpositions when the ignition ischanged from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Memory Seats0 58.

Touch Off or On.

Seat Exit Memory

This feature automatically recallsthe previously stored exit buttonpositions when the ignition ischanged from on or ACC/ACCESSORY to off if the driverdoor is open or opened. SeeMemory Seats 0 58.

Touch Off or On.

Trailering


. Side Trailer Camera

. Bed View Camera Lighting

Side Trailer Camera

This feature specifies if using theturn signal during a lane change willalso display an applicable side viewof the trailer and vehicle. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 257.

Touch Off or On.

Bed View Camera Lighting

This feature specifies if the truckbed rail lights are turned on whenthe Bed View Camera is active. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 257.

Touch Off or On.

Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings”in the infotainment manual.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainmentsystem and steering wheel controls.It may also limit access to vehiclestorage locations, if equipped.



To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Select Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back togo back to the previous menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 472.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S., Canada, or PuertoRico, international rates will applyand may differ based on landline ormobile phone.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 in) away from theUniversal Remote systembuttons with the indicator lightin view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of the garagedoor opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one ofthe three Universal Remotesystem buttons to be used tooperate the garage door. Donot release either button untilthe indicator light goes from aslow to a rapid flashing light.Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openersmay require substitution ofStep 2 with the procedureunder “Radio Signals for SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage dooractivation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.



Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smartbutton inside the garage on thegarage door opener receiver.The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote systembutton for two seconds andthen release it. If the garagedoor does not move or thelamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,

press and hold the samebutton a second time fortwo seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does notmove or the garage door lampdoes not flash, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Some GateOperators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515. For calls placedoutside the U.S., Canada, or PuertoRico, international rates will applyand may differ based on landline ormobile phone.

Some radio–frequency laws andgate operators require transmittersignals to time out or quit afterseveral seconds of transmission.

This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.



Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This shouldtake about 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”


Lighting 165

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 165Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 169Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Task Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . 171

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Battery Load Management . . . 174Battery Power Protection . . . . . 174Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to O again to turn the

automatic headlamps or DRLback on.


166 Lighting

For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle is inP (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped),front/rear sidemarker lamps, andlicense plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps and fog lamps,if equipped.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,roof marker lamps (if equipped),front/rear sidemarker lamps, andlicense plate lamps.

For some trim levels and series oftrucks first sold in Canada, theheadlamps may turn on with theparking lamps."

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps are

turned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlampsstay on for an additional 10 minutes.To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.

K : If equipped, turns on the tasklighting. See Task Lighting 0 171.

IntelliBeam System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps onand off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is darkenough and there is no other trafficpresent.

This lightb comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,press the button on the end of theturn signal lever when the exteriorlamp control is in the AUTO or2position. The blue high-beam onlight appears on the instrumentcluster when the high beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield thatautomatically controls the system.


Lighting 167

Keep this area of the windshieldclear of debris to allow for bestsystem performance.

The high-beam headlamps remainon, under the automatic control,until one of the following situationsoccurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system isdisabled by the button on theturn signal lever. If this happens,press the button on the end ofthe turn signal lever when theexterior lamp control is in theAUTO or2 position. Theinstrument cluster light will comeon to indicate the IntelliBeam is

reactivated. See HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam Changer 0 167andFlash-to-Pass 0 168.

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructedfrom view, or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist, or other airborneobstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end points upward,causing the light sensor to aimhigh and not detect headlampsand taillamps.

. Driving on winding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beamheadlamps may need to be disabledif any of the above conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever towardthe instrument panel to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.

Pull or push the turn signal lever toreturn to low-beam headlamps.


168 Lighting

When the high-beam headlamps areon, this indicator light on theinstrument cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. Depending on the type ofheadlamp, they will either turn offafter a short duration or stay on aslong as you hold the lever towardyou. The high-beam indicator on the

instrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then release.For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle isparked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.


Lighting 169

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If itis light outside when the vehicleleaves the garage, there is a slightdelay before the automaticheadlamp system changes to theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL).During that delay, the instrument

cluster may not be as bright asusual. Make sure the instrumentpanel illumination control is in thefull bright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control 0 172.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to DRL.

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control to Oor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.


170 Lighting

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Partially raise or lower the lever forless than one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out. If equipped with LEDturn signals, see your dealer.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers 0 370.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. A message may appear inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Messages 0 155. Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

If equipped, the fog lamp control isnear the exterior lamp control to theleft of the steering column.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to come on.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. A light will come on in theinstrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.


Lighting 171

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

Task Lighting

If equipped, task lighting projectslight from the outside mirrors awayfrom the vehicle.

While the vehicle is parked,pressK to select one of thefollowing options:

. Left and Right Task LightsIlluminated

. Left Task Light Illuminated

. Right Task Light Illuminated

. Left and Right Task Lights Off

If the vehicle leaves a parkedposition, the lights will immediatelyturn off.

If the vehicle is off, the lights willstay on for approximately10 minutes.

If any Task lights are on, if thebutton has not been pressed afterapproximately 5 seconds, pressingit again will turn off all Task Lights.

Exterior Cargo Lamps

The cargo lamps provide more lightin the cargo area or on the sides ofthe vehicle, if needed. The lampsinside the pickup box, in the tailgatehandle, for the hitch, and/or thecargo mirror lamps also turn on,if equipped.


172 Lighting

If the vehicle is in P (Park),R (Reverse), or N (Neutral) theCargo Lamp Switch causes thelights to cycle through the followingstates for each button press:

- Initial Press:

- CHMSL/Cargo Bed Lights - On

- Cargo Mirror Lights - On

- Cargo Switch Indicator (ifequipped) - On

- Next Press: (if with in 5 seconds ofthe previous button press):

- CHMSL/Cargo Bed Lights - On

- Cargo Mirror Lights - Off

- Cargo Switch Indicator (ifequipped) - On

- Next Press:

- CHMSL/Cargo Bed Lights - Off

- Cargo Mirror Lights - Off

- Cargo Switch Indicator (ifequipped) - Off

Become familiar with and follow allstate and local laws that apply tocargo lamp operation.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the steering wheel and instrumentpanel lights. The instrument panelillumination control is next to theexterior lamp control.

D : PressD + to brighten orD −to dim the lights.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are in theoverhead console.

To operate, press the followingbuttons:

j OFF : Press to turn off thedome lamps when a door is open.An indicator light on the button willturn on when the dome lampoverride is activated. PressjOFF again to deactivate this featureand the indicator light will turn off.The dome lamps will come on whendoors are opened.


Lighting 173

+ ON/OFF : Press to turn the domelamps on manually. Press again toturn the dome lamps off.

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps on theoverhead console and over the rearseats. These lamps come on whenany door is opened.

Front Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are in theoverhead console.

Press the lamp lenses to turn thefront reading lamps on or off.

Rear Reading Lamps

The rear reading lamps are over therear seats.

Press the lamp lens to turn the rearreading lamps on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and the interiorlamps turn on briefly at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. When adoor is opened, the interior lampscome on. After about 30 secondsthe exterior lamps turn off. Entrylighting can be disabled manually bychanging the ignition out of the OFFposition, or by pressing the RKEtransmitter Q button.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlights come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The dome lamp comeson after the ignition is turned off.


174 Lighting

The exterior lamps and dome lampremain on for a set amount of time,then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 156.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltage

moving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps, if they are left on formore than 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. The cargolamp shuts off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents the battery fromrunning down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against drainingthe battery. To restart the 10-minute


Lighting 175

timer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


176 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces enginenoise in the vehicle’s interior. ANCrequires the factory-installed audiosystem, radio, speakers, amplifier(if equipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by yourdealer if related aftermarketequipment is installed.


Climate Controls 177

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 177Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with thissystem.

1. Fan Control

2. MAX Defrost

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. A/C (Air Conditioning)

5. TEMP (Temperature Control)

6. Recirculation

7. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped) or Heated Mirrors (IfEquipped)

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the fan off.

TEMP : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside thevehicle.


178 Climate Controls

Air Delivery Mode Controls :Pressz, Y, or[ to change the

direction of the airflow. Anycombination of the three controlscan be selected. An indicator lightcomes on in the selected modebutton.

To change the current mode, selectone or more of the following. Anindicator light will illuminate:

z : Air is directed to thewindshield, outboard a/c outlets,and side window outlets.

Y : Air is directed to the a/c outlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some air directed to thewindshield, outboard a/c outlets,and side window outlets.

0 MAX : Air is directed to thewindshield and the fan runs at ahigher speed if not already above amedium fan speed. This modeoverrides the previous modeselected and clears fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly. When

the control is pressed again, thesystem returns to the previous modesetting and fan speed.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool theinside of the vehicle. It can also beused to help reduce outside air andodors that enter the vehicle.

Avoid using recirculation for longperiods of time in cold or dampconditions. Using recirculation incold or damp conditions can resultin window fogging.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning on or off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is enabled. If the fan isturned off, the air conditioner will notrun. The A/C light will stay on evenif the outside temperatures arebelow freezing.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR : If equipped, press toturn the rear window defogger on oroff. An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the rearwindow defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the engine is running.The defogger turns off if the ignitionis turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

If equipped with heated outsidemirrors, pressf to turn them on oroff. See Heated Mirrors 0 43.

Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with thissystem.

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. MAX Defrost



5. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

6. Recirculation

7. Power Button

8. Fan Control

9. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped) or Heated Mirrors (IfEquipped)

10. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Display

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Settings

2. Fan Control

3. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

4. Sync (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. Recirculation


7. Auto (Automatic Operation)


9. On/Off (Power)



The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and Sync settingscan be controlled by touchingCLIMATE on the infotainment HomePage or the climate button in theclimate control display applicationtray. A selection can then be madeon the front climate control pagedisplayed. See the infotainmentmanual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the centerstack climate controls are adjusted.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When AUTO is lit, all four functionsoperate automatically. Each functioncan also be manually set and theselected setting is displayed.Functions not manually set willcontinue to be automaticallycontrolled, even if the AUTOindicator is not lit.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Adjustthe temperature as needed forbest comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.See@ under “Manual Operation”for more details.

Manual Operation

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press theknob to turn the fan off. When off isselected, a small amount of air maystill come out of the outletsdepending on vehicle speed. If anybuttons are pressed or knobs areturned, the climate control systemwill turn on and operate at thecurrent setting.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control : Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting. The driver side



or passenger side temperaturedisplay shows the temperaturesetting increasing or decreasing.

SYNC : Press to link the passengertemperature setting to the driversetting. The SYNC indicator light willturn on. When the passenger settingis adjusted, the SYNC indicator lightwill turn off.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Pressz,Y, or[ to change thedirection of the airflow. Anycombination of the three controlscan be selected. An indicator lightcomes on in the selected modebutton.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone or more of the following:

z : Air is directed to thewindshield, outboard a/c outlets,and side window outlets.

Y : Air is directed to the a/c outlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets, with some air directed to thewindshield, outboard a/c outlets,and side window outlets.

0 MAX : Air is directed to thewindshield and the fan runs at ahigher speed if not already above amedium fan speed. This modeoverrides the previous modeselected and clears fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly. Whenthe control is pressed again, thesystem returns to the previous modesetting and fan speed.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

@ : Press to turn on recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated to quickly cool theinside of the vehicle. It can also beused to help reduce outside air andodors that enter the vehicle.

Avoid using recirculation for longperiods of time in cold or dampconditions. Using recirculation incold or damp conditions can resultin window fogging.

A/C : Press to turn the airconditioning on or off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is enabled. If the fan isturned off, the air conditioner will notrun. The A/C light will stay on evenif the outside temperatures arebelow freezing.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR : If equipped, press toturn the rear window defogger on oroff. An indicator light on the buttoncomes on to show that the rearwindow defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the engine is running.The defogger turns off if the ignitionis turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

If equipped with heated outsidemirrors, pressf to turn them on or

off. See Heated Mirrors 0 43.



Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with remotestart, the climate control systemmay run when the vehicle is startedremotely. If equipped with heated orventilated seats or a heated steeringwheel, these features may come onduring a remote start. See RemoteVehicle Start 0 25, Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 60, andHeated Steering Wheel 0 119.

Sensors

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

Do not cover the sensor; otherwisethe automatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Air VentsUse the sliding knobs on the centerand side air vents to change thedirection of the airflow.

Air vents blow warm air on the sidewindows in cold weather. If Floor,Defog, or Defrost modes areselected, a small amount of air willcome from the vents close to thewindow.

To close the front a/c vents, movethe sliding knobs to the full downposition.

To close the rear a/c vents, movethe sliding knobs to the full inboardposition.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow,or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.


Climate Controls 183. Clear snow off the hood to

improve visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces the dust, pollen,and other airborne irritants fromoutside air that is pulled into thevehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule 0 441.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts 0 454.

1. Open the lower glove box doorcompletely.

2. Push the dampener arm to theleft until it releases theglovebox.



3. Press the sides of the glovebox door inward and rotate thedoor downward to remove.

4. Pull lever on left side of thefilter door and slide left, thenremove the door. Remove theold filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Reinstall the filter door.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.


Driving and Operating 185

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 188Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 190Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 196Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 197Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 199Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 200Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 208Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 212Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 218Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Active Fuel Management . . . . . 219Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 221Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

BrakesElectric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . 232Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 233

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 235

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . 237Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . 238Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . 242Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Adaptive Cruise Control (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . 255Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . 257

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) System (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274


186 Driving and Operating

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . 274Lane Departure Warning(LDW) (2500/3500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Recommended Fuel (Except6.2L V8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Recommended Fuel (6.2LV8 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 281Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Filling the Tank (PickupModel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Filling the Tank (Chassis CabModel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 308Trailering App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible:

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn themoff when not required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.


Driving and Operating 187. Combine several trips into a

single trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment manual formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 64.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they may do andbe ready.


188 Driving and Operating. Allow enough following distance

between you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops or a brakefault occurs, the brakes may losepower assist. More effort will berequired to stop the vehicle. It maytake longer to stop.

Steering

Caution

To avoid damage to the steeringsystem, do not drive over curbs,parking barriers, or similar objectsat speeds greater than 3 km/h(1 mph). Use care when drivingover other objects such as lanedividers and speed bumps.Damage caused by misuse of thevehicle is not covered by thevehicle warranty.



Electric Power Steering (1500Series)

This vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Power Steering (2500/3500Series)

(2500/3500 Series - All RegularCab, Double Cab/Crew Cabwithout Digital Steer Assist)

The power steering system mayrequire maintenance. See PowerSteering Fluid 0 354.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer.

(2500/3500 Series - Double Cab/Crew Cab with Digital SteerAssist)

The vehicle has a Digital SteerAssist power steering system thatvaries the amount of effort requiredto steer the vehicle. Less steeringeffort is required at slower speeds.At faster speeds, the requiredsteering effort increases. Thesystem helps the steering wheelreturn to center at low speeds.Pressing the Tow/Haul buttonadjusts steering effort for drivingconditions described in Tow/HaulMode 0 227.

The power steering system mayrequire maintenance. See PowerSteering Fluid 0 354.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer.



Caution

Do not hold the steering wheel atfull rotation for more than15 seconds and/or at an elevatedRPM. Damage may occur to thepower steering system and theremay be loss of power steeringassist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Forcontact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see thewarranty manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear seat belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.

. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Remove any underbody airdeflector, if equipped. Re-attachthe air deflector after off-roaddriving.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.



To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lower airdam, if equipped. However, drivingwithout the air dam reduces fueleconomy.

Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper airflow to theengine. Reattach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargoarea as far forward and aslow as possible. Theheaviest things should beon the floor, forward of therear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roofraise the vehicle's center ofgravity, making it more likelyto roll over. You can beseriously or fatally injured ifthe vehicle rolls over. Putheavy loads inside thecargo area, not on the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits0 200 andTires 0 379.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn 0 219.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills can

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

cause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:

. Use a low gear and keep a firmgrip on the steering wheel.

. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause a crash. Therecould be a drop-off, embankment,cliff, or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two-speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

transfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly when

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If a brake fade condition is detected,a DIC warning message isdisplayed. Adjust brake pedal useand shift to a lower transmissiongear to reduce braking.

If the brakes continue to fade to asevere condition, additional DICmessages are displayed. The brakesystem warning light will illuminate,and the vehicle speed may belimited. See Brake System WarningLight 0 139.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.

. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot berestarted after stalling, set theparking brake, shift intoP (Park), and turn thevehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.


Driving and Operating 195. Hidden obstacles can make the

steepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lowerthe gear. Keep the vehicle movingto avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.



Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive through it slowly. At fasterspeeds, water can get into theengine and cause it to stall. Stallingcan occur if the exhaust pipe isunder water. Do not turn off theignition when driving through water.If the exhaust pipe is under water,the engine will not start. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.Re-install underbody air deflectorand air dam if removed.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, driveline,steering, suspension, wheels, tires,and exhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule 0 441.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is



wet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 379.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

loss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, crash).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) when



freezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For Slippery Road Driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 235.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) improves vehicle stabilityduring hard stops, but thebrakes should be applied soonerthan when on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) 0 232.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 466. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and setthe fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 220.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.



If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

The Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 235. If TC/ESC cannot free thevehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out” following.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains 0 404.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Caution

Do not hold the steering wheel atfull rotation for more than15 seconds and/or at an elevatedRPM. Damage may occur to thepower steering system and theremay be loss of power steeringassist.

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Then make sure thewheels are pointed straight ahead.For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shiftinto Four-Wheel Drive High. Turnthe TCS off. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 424. Recoveryhooks can be used, if the vehiclehas them.



Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

Caution

Never use recovery hooks to towthe vehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

There are recovery hooks at thefront of the vehicle. Use them if thevehicle is stuck off-road and needsto be pulled some place to continuedriving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipment

tires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 379andTire Pressure 0 387.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely



exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 292 forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = (453 kg)(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lb) × 2 =136 kg (300 lb)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lb)

Example 2

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lb) × 5 =340 kg (750 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lb)



Example 3

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lb) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lb)

Refer to the Tire and LoadingInformation label for specificinformation about the vehicle'scapacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight

of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel may show the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR

includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To determinethe actual loads on the front andrear axles, weigh the vehicle ata weigh station. Your dealer canhelp with this. Be sure to spreadthe load equally on both sides ofthe centerline.

The Certification/Tire label alsocontains important informationabout the Front Axle ReserveCapacity. See Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment0 323.



{ Warning

In the case of a sudden stopor collision, things carried inthe bed of your truck couldshift forward and come intothe passenger area, injuringyou and others. If you putthings in the bed of your truck,you should make sure theyare properly secured.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change theweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help load the vehicle theright way.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving“under Off-Road Driving 0 191.

Two-Tiered Loading

Depending on the model of thepickup, an upper load platformcan be created by positioningthree or four 5 cm (2 in) by15 cm (6 in) wooden planksacross the width of the pickupbox. The planks must beinserted in the pickup boxdepressions.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle. Thezone is located in the areabetween the front of each wheelwell and the rear of each wheel



well. The center of gravity heightmust not extend above the topof the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items,a limit on how many peoplecarried inside the vehicle maybe necessary. Be sure to weighthe vehicle before buying andinstalling the new equipment.

Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

* EquipmentMaximumWeight

Ladder Rackand Cargo

340 kg (750 lb)

Cross Toolboxand Cargo

181 kg (400 lb)

Side Boxesand Cargo

113 kg perside (250 lbper side)

* The combined weight for allrail-mounted equipment shouldnot exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb).

Loading Points

1. Primary Load Points2. Secondary Load Areas3. GM Approved Accessory

Mounting Points

Structural members (1) and (2) areincluded in the pickup box design.Additional accessories should usethese load points. Depending on theaccessory design, use a spacerunder the accessory at the loadpoints to remove gap. The holes forGM approved accessories (3) arenot intended for aftermarket



equipment. See www.gmupfitter.comfor additional pickup box loadbearing structural information.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationA vehicle-specific Truck-CamperLoading Information label isattached to the inside of thevehicle's glove box. This labelindicates if a slide-in campercan be carried, how much of aload the vehicle can carry, andhow to correctly spread out theload. It will help to match theright slide-in camper to thevehicle.

Your dealer can help make agood vehicle-camper match andhelp determine the CargoWeight Rating (CWR).

When installing and loading aslide-in camper, check themanufacturer's instructions.

When carrying a slide-incamper, the total cargo load ofthe vehicle is the weight of thecamper plus:

. Everything added to thecamper after it left thefactory.

. Everything in the camper.

. All the people inside.

The CWR is the maximumweight of the load the vehiclecan carry. It does not include theweight of the people inside. But,use about 68 kg (150 lb) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle's CWR.

Refer to the Truck-CamperLoading Information label in theglove box for dimensions A andB as shown in the followingillustration.

Use the rear edge of the loadfloor for measurement purposes.The recommended location forthe cargo center of gravity is inzone C for the CWR. It is thepoint where the mass of a bodyis concentrated and,if suspended at that point, wouldbalance the front and rear.

Here is an example of propertruck and camper match:



1. Camper Center ofGravity

2. Recommended Center ofGravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carrya slide-in camper, the total cargoload of the truck consists of themanufacturer's camper weightfigure, the weight of installedadditional camper equipment notincluded in the manufacturer'scamper weight figure, the weightof camper cargo, and the weightof passengers in the camper.The total cargo load should not

exceed the truck's cargo weightrating, and the camper's centerof gravity (1) should fall withinthe truck's recommended centerof gravity zone (2) wheninstalled.

Any accessories or otherequipment that are added to thevehicle must be weighed. Then,subtract this extra weight fromthe CWR. This extra weight mayshorten the center of gravityzone of the vehicle.

If the slide-in camper and itsload weighs less than the CWR,the center of gravity zone for thevehicle may be larger.

Secure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of the vehicle. When thetruck-camper is loaded, drive toa scale and weigh on the frontand on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of the

gross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total axle loadsshould not exceed the vehicle'sgross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the Certification/Tirelabel attached to the B-pillar.See “Certification/Tire Label”under Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200. If weight ratingsare exceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights belowthe ratings.

See your dealer for moreinformation on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo WeightRating, and the correct center ofgravity zone.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 292 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

Vehicles equipped with KeylessAccess have pushbutton starting.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference



to the Keyless Access system. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Key Access)0 13 orRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation (Keyless Access)0 16.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be on or in Service Mode, andthe brake pedal must be applied.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF (No Indicator Lights) : Whenthe vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 216.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willturn off.

The vehicle may have an electricsteering column lock. The lock isactivated when the ignition is turnedoff and driver door is opened.A sound may be heard as the lockactuates or releases. The steeringcolumn lock may not release withthe wheels turned off center. If thishappens, the vehicle may not start.Move the steering wheel from left toright while attempting to start thevehicle. If this does not work, thevehicle needs service.

Unless an emergency exists, do notturn the engine off when the vehicleis moving. This will cause a loss of

power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut offwhile driving, press and holdENGINE START/STOP buttonfor longer than two seconds,or press twice in five seconds.

2. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

4. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and make sureengine is off. The shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition off.



5. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 233.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light) : This mode allowssome electrical accessories to beused when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing theENGINE START/STOP button onetime without the brake pedal appliedwill place the ignition system inACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and

the brake pedal applied, pressingENGINE START/STOP button oncewill turn the ignition on. Once enginecranking begins, release the button.Engine cranking will continue untilthe engine starts. See Starting theEngine 0 212.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the ENGINESTART/STOP button for more thanfive seconds will place the vehicle inService Mode. The instruments andaudio systems will operate as theydo when the ignition is on, but thevehicle will not be able to be driven.The engine will not start in ServiceMode. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button again to turn theignition off.

Ignition Positions (KeyAccess)

0. Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF

1. ACC/ACCESSORY

2. ON/RUN

3. START

The ignition switch has fourpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be ON/RUN and the brakepedal must be applied.



0 (Stopping the Engine/LOCK/OFF) : This position turns off thevehicle. It also locks the ignition, thetransmission, and the steeringcolumn, if equipped with a lockingsteering column.

To turn off the vehicle:

1. Make sure that the vehicle isstopped.

2. Shift to P (Park).

3. Continue to hold the brakepedal, then set the parkingbrake. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 233.

4. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column,then turn the key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key.

6. Release the brake pedal.

See your dealer if the key can beremoved in any other position.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 216.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

If equipped with a locking steeringcolumn, the steering can bind withthe front wheels turned off center,which may prevent key rotation outof LOCK/OFF. If this happens, movethe steering wheel from right to leftwhile turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, turn off the vehicleonly in an emergency.

In an emergency, if the vehiclecannot be pulled over and must beturned off while driving:

1. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Brake using firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

3. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. Continuebraking and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

4. Come to a complete stop.



5. Shift to P (Park).

6. Push the key all the way intoward the steering column (1),then turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF (2).


8. Remove the key.


Caution

Use the correct key, make sure itis all the way in — or pushed allthe way in toward the steeringcolumn when turning off thevehicle — and turn it only withyour hand.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : Thisposition allows features such as theinfotainment system to operatewhile the vehicle is off. It alsounlocks the steering column,if equipped with a locking steeringcolumn. Use this position if the

vehicle must be pushed or towed.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 216.

From ON/RUN, push the key all theway in toward the steering column,then turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

If the key is left in ACC/ACCESSORY with the engine off,the battery could drain and thevehicle may not start.

A warning chime will sound whenthe driver door is opened and thekey is in the ignition.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition.

If the key is left in ON/RUN with theengine off, the battery could drainand the vehicle may not start.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionreturns to ON/RUN for driving.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 322.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.



Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. For Key Access vehicles, turnthe ignition key to Start. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. For Keyless Accessvehicles, the RKE transmittermust be in the vehicle. PressENGINE START/STOP with thebrake pedal applied. When theengine begins cranking, let goof the button.

The driver may observe aminor, and temporary, brakepedal kickback when startingthe vehicle. This is normal.

The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the

engine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

When the low fuel warning lightis on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter five to 10 seconds,especially in very cold weather(below −18 °C or 0 °F), it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the

accelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it therewhile holding the key in STARTor ENGINE START/STOP forup to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key orbutton and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, do the same thing.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently untilthe oil warms up and lubricatesall moving parts.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start systemwill shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. It has componentsdesigned for the increased numberof starts.



{ Warning

The automatic engine Stop/Startfeature causes the engine to shutoff while the vehicle is still on. Donot exit the vehicle before shiftingto P (Park). The vehicle mayrestart and move unexpectedly.Always shift to P (Park), and thenturn the ignition off before exitingthe vehicle.

Auto Engine Stop/Start

When the brakes are applied andthe vehicle is at a complete stop,the engine may turn off. Whenstopped, the tachometer displaysAUTO STOP. See Tachometer0 131. When the brake pedal isreleased or the accelerator pedal ispressed, the engine will restart.

To maintain vehicle performance,other conditions may cause theengine to automatically restartbefore the brake pedal is released.

Auto Stops may not occur and/orAuto Starts may occur because:

. The climate control settingsrequire the engine to be runningto cool or heat the vehicleinterior.

. The vehicle battery chargeis low.

. The vehicle battery has recentlybeen disconnected.

. Minimum vehicle speed has notbeen reached since the lastAuto Stop.

. The accelerator pedal ispressed.

. The engine or transmission isnot at the required operatingtemperature.

. The outside temperature is notin the required operating range.

. The vehicle is in any gear otherthan D (Drive).

. Tow/Haul Mode or other drivermodes have been selected.

. The vehicle is on a steep hill orgrade.

. The driver door has beenopened or the driver seat belthas been unbuckled.

. The hood has been opened.

. The Auto Stop has reached themaximum allowed time.

Auto Stop Disable Switch

If equipped, the automatic engineStop/Start feature can be disabledand enabled by pressing the switchwith theh symbol. Auto Stop isenabled each time you start thevehicle.



Whenh is illuminated, the systemis enabled.

Engine HeaterIf equipped, the engine heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord may exist,which will prevent engine heateroperation at temperatures above−18 °C (0 °F).

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

1500 Base Model shown othermodels are similar

2500/3500

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. 1500 only, remove the engineheater connector cover bygently prying with a flatblade tool.

4. Plug the heater cord into theconnector in the front fascia.



5. Plug the cord into a grounded110-volt AC outlet that isprotected by a ground faultdetection function.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could make

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

6. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and storethe cord.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)When the ignition is turned from onto off, the following features (ifequipped) will continue to functionfor up to 10 minutes, or until thedriver door is opened. Thesefeatures will also work when theignition is in RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY:

. Infotainment System

. Power Windows (during RAPthis functionality will be lostwhen any door is opened)

. Sunroof (during RAP thisfunctionality will be lost whenany door is opened)

. Auxiliary Power Outlet

. Audio System

. OnStar System



Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. With four-wheel drive,if the transfer case is inN (Neutral), the vehicle will befree to roll, even if the shift leveris in P (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 287.

1. Hold the brake pedal down,then set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 233.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case (ifequipped) is in a drivegear – not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition off. For KeyAccess, push the ignition keyin, towards the steering columnand then turn the ignition off.

5. For Key Access, remove thekey and take it with you. If youcan leave the vehicle with theignition key in your hand, thevehicle is in P (Park).

For Keyless Access, take theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter with you.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.



If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After moving the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave thedriver seat.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The system is designed to preventmovement of the shift lever out ofP (Park), unless the brake pedal isapplied and the ignition is on or inService Mode.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage – lessthan 9 volt – battery.

If the vehicle has an uncharged orlow voltage battery, try charging orjump starting the battery. See JumpStarting - North America 0 419.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake if itis applied. See Electric ParkingBrake 0 233.

3. Pull the shift lever toward you,then move it to the desiredposition, and release.

If the vehicle still cannot be shiftedout of P (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on,or release the shift lever.

2. While holding the brake pedal,push the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park).

3. Pull the shift lever toward you,then move it to the desiredposition, and release.

If there is still a problem shifting,have the vehicle serviced soon.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementIf equipped, Active FuelManagement allows the gasolineengine to operate on either all of itscylinders, or a reduced number ofcylinders, depending on the drivingconditions. When less power isrequired, such as cruising at aconstant vehicle speed, the systemwill enable reduced cylinderoperation, allowing the vehicle toachieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power is required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

Dynamic Fuel Management

If equipped, Dynamic FuelManagement calculates the numberof cylinders needed to maximizefuel economy and meet the drivingdemands. Dynamic FuelManagement allows the engine tooperate in multiple possibleconfigurations ranging from1-cylinder up to the full 8-cylinderoperation.

Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 217 andEngine Exhaust 0 220.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitteroutside the vehicle, it will continueto run for up to half an hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to an hour.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 217 andEngine Exhaust 0 220.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 287.



AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY, on orservice mode.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See Driver Mode Control 0 238 and“Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 224.

P : This position locks the rearwheels. Use P (Park) when startingthe engine because the vehiclecannot move easily.

When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 217.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 217 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 287.

{ Warning

If equipped with four-wheel drive,the vehicle will be free to roll if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral),even when the shift lever is inP (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure the transfer case is in a drive

gear — 2 m, 4 m, or 4 n — or set theparking brake before placing thetransfer case in N (Neutral). SeeFour-Wheel Drive 0 227.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.



To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 199.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicleis already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution

A transmission or engine oil hotmessage may display if theautomatic transmission fluid orengine oil is too hot. Drivingunder this condition can damagethe vehicle. Stop and idle theengine to cool the engine oil orautomatic transmission fluid.These messages will clear whenthe engine oil or transmissionfluid has cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If more power is neededfor passing, press the acceleratorpedal down.

. When going less than about55 km/h (35 mph), push theaccelerator pedal abouthalfway down.

. When going about 55 km/h(35 mph) or more, push theaccelerator all the way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Modewhen towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, driving on steep hills,or driving off-road. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 190.



The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

If the engine or transmission detectsan impending hot fluid condition, thetransmission may upshift to limittemperatures. Downshifts may alsobe prevented. Normal operationmay continue unless the displayindicates there is a hot conditionand engine should be idled.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

If equipped with the 2.7L L4 engine,engine speeds may be increasedwhile driving at highway speedswhile the engine is still warming up.

L : This position allows selection ofa range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions.If equipped, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode 0 224.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.



Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

Range Selection Mode helps controlthe vehicle's transmission andvehicle speed while driving downhillor towing a trailer by letting youselect a desired range of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toL (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonson the shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the L,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in L (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when L5 is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by thetransmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot beused until the plus/minus button onthe shift lever is used to change tothe range.

When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.See the following charts.



6-Speed Automatic Transmission

Gear before shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting fromD (Drive) to L (Manual Mode)

L4 L4 L3 L2 L2 L1


Gear beforeshifting fromD (Drive) toL (Manual Mode)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) –Tow/Haul notengaged

L6 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range aftershifting fromD (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) –Tow/Haul engaged

L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1




Gear before shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode)

10th 9th 8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul not engaged

L7 L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L2 L1

Range after shifting from D (Drive) toL (Manual Mode) - Tow/Haul engaged

L7 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L3 L3 L2 L1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 227.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

If the vehicle has an exhaust brake,it can also be used, but will notautomatically downshift thetransmission. See “Exhaust Brake”in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Low Traction Mode

If equipped, Low Traction Modeassists in vehicle acceleration whenroad conditions are slippery, suchas with ice or snow. While thevehicle is at a stop, select L2 usingRange Selection Mode. This willlimit torque to the wheels and helpprevent the tires from spinning.



Tow/Haul ModeThe Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling. This providesincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and enhanced transmissionand engine cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, when towing, or whenhauling heavy loads. See DriverMode Control 0 238 to activate Tow/Haul Mode.

For vehicles without Driver ModeControl, press the Tow/Haul buttonon the center stack.

If equipped, the Stop/Start systemwill become unavailable when Tow/Haul Mode is active.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See Manual Mode 0 224. Tow/HaulMode Grade Braking assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle.

See Towing Equipment 0 296.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, four-wheel driveengages the front axle for extratraction.

Read the appropriate section fortransfer case operation beforeusing.

Caution

Do not drive on clean, dry

pavement in 4 m and 4 n (ifequipped) for an extended periodof time. These conditions maycause premature wear on thevehicle’s powertrain.

Driving on clean, dry pavement in4 m or 4 n may:

. Cause a vibration to be felt inthe steering system.

. Cause tires to wear faster.



{ Warning

If equipped with four-wheel drive,the vehicle will be free to roll if thetransfer case is in N (Neutral),even when the shift lever is inP (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure the transfer case is in a drive

gear — 2 m, 4 m, or 4 n — or set theparking brake before placing thetransfer case in N (Neutral). SeeShifting Into Park 0 217.

Caution

Extended high-speed operation in

4 n may damage or shorten thelife of the drivetrain.

An engagement noise and bump isnormal when shifting between 4 nand 4 m or N (Neutral), with theengine running.

Shifting into 4 n will turn TractionControl and StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 235.

Automatic Transfer Case

Two-Speed Transfer Case

If equipped, the transfer casecontrols are used to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

To shift the transfer case, press thedesired button. The graphic in theinstrument cluster will flash while a

shift is in progress. The graphicdisplayed will change to indicate thesetting requested.

When the shift is complete thegraphic will stop flashing. The DICmessage turns off once the shift iscomplete. If the transfer casecannot complete a shift request, itwill go back to its last chosensetting.

The settings are:

N (Neutral) : Use only when thevehicle needs to be towed. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 424orTowing the Vehicle 0 424.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive) : Use when road surfaceconditions are variable. Whendriving in AUTO, the front axle isengaged, and the vehicle's power issent to the front and rear wheels



automatically based on drivingconditions. This setting providesslightly lower fuel economy than 2 m.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : Thissetting engages the front axle anddelivers extra torque. Choose 4 nwhen driving off-road in deep sand,deep mud, or deep snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

While driving in 4 n, keep vehicle

speed below 72 km/h (45 mph).

Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction

Control and StabiliTrak/ESC off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 235.

Shifts between 2m, 4 m, and AUTO

Any of these shifts can be made atnormal driving speed.

The actual 4x4 shift request is onlymade after the button is released.The 4x4 graphic will remain flashinguntil the shift request hascompleted. A DIC message displaysto indicate that the 4x4 transfer casehas been requested to shift to thenew desired state.

Once the 4x4 shift has completed,the DIC message disappears, the4x4 graphic stops flashing, and thecurrent setting is indicated.

When a shift to 2 m is completedsuccessfully while in P (Park), theparking brake will engage. Toresume driving, shift thetransmission to the desired gearand manually release the parkingbrake or press the accelerator pedalto begin driving. See ElectricParking Brake 0 233.

If equipped, use 4 n, AUTO, or 4 m toprovide additional traction whenparking on a steep grade with poortraction such as ice, snow, mud,or gravel.

Shifting Into 4 n1. The ignition must be on and

the vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral). It is best for thevehicle to be moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Press 4 n. The actual 4x4 shiftrequest is only made after thebutton is released. The 4x4graphic will remain flashinguntil the shift request hascompleted. A DIC messagedisplays to indicate that the 4x4transfer case has beenrequested to shift to the newdesired state.

Once the 4x4 shift hascompleted, the DIC messagedisappears, the 4x4 graphicstops flashing and the currentsetting is indicated.

If vehicle speed is higher when shiftrequest occurs, a DIC messagedisplays. Reduce vehicle speed.



If the transmission is not inN (Neutral) when shift requestoccurs, a DIC message displays.The vehicle will allow 20 secondsfor the shift to occur. After this time,a graphic in the instrument clusterwill indicate that the transfer case isin 4 n.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is not shifted intoN (Neutral) or the vehicle has notslowed to 5 km/h (3 mph) within20 seconds, the transfer case willremain in its original state. This willbe indicated in the instrumentcluster.

With the vehicle moving less than5 km/h (3 mph) and the transmissionin N (Neutral), attempt the shiftagain.

Shifting Out of 4 n1. The vehicle must be stopped or

moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmissionin N (Neutral) and the ignitionon. It is best for the vehicle tobe moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

2. Press 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m. Theactual 4x4 shift request is onlymade after the button isreleased. The 4x4 graphic willremain flashing until the shiftrequest has completed. A DICmessage displays to indicatethe state of the request.

Once the 4x4 shift hascompleted, the DIC messagedisappears, the 4x4 graphicstops flashing, and the currentsetting is indicated.

If vehicle speed is higher whenshift request occurs, a DICmessage displays. Reducevehicle speed.

If the transmission is not inN (Neutral) when shift requestoccurs, DIC messages will display.The vehicle will allow 20 secondsfor this shift to occur. After this time,a graphic in the instrument clusterwill indicate that the transfer case isin 4 n.

Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case.

If the transmission is not shifted intoN (Neutral) or the vehicle has notslowed to 5 km/h (3 mph) within20 seconds, the transfer case willremain in its original state. This willbe indicated in the instrumentcluster.

With the vehicle moving less than5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.



Shifting Into N (Neutral)

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

3. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.4. Apply the parking brake and/or

brake pedal.

5. Press 2 m five times in10 seconds until the N (Neutral)graphic starts flashing in theinstrument cluster. When theshift is complete, the graphicstops flashing. If the parkingbrake and/or brake pedal is notapplied within 20 seconds, thetransfer case will remain in theoriginal state.

6. If the transmission is notshifted into N (Neutral) or thevehicle has not slowed to5 km/h (3 mph) within20 seconds, the transfer casewill remain in its original state.This will be indicated in theinstrument cluster.

Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Turn the ignition on with theengine off. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access)0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.



4. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.Transfer case shifts out ofN (Neutral) can only be madeinto 2 m. When the shift to 2 m iscomplete, the graphic in theinstrument cluster will stopflashing. If the transfer casecannot complete a shift, thegraphic will return to thepreviously selected setting.

Single Speed Transfer Case

If equipped, the transfer casecontrols are used to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

To shift the transfer case, press thedesired button. The graphic in theinstrument cluster will flash while ashift is in progress. The graphicdisplayed will change to indicate thesetting requested.

When the shift is complete thegraphic will stop flashing. The DICmessage turns off once the shift iscomplete. If the transfer case



cannot complete a shift request, itwill go back to its last chosensetting.

The settings are:

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High) : Usefor driving on most streets andhighways. The front axle is notengaged. This setting provides thebest fuel economy.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High) : Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as when driving onsnowy or icy roads, whenoff-roading, or when plowing snow.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive)

Use when road surface conditionsare variable. When driving in AUTO,the front axle is engaged, and thevehicle's power is sent to the frontand rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Thissetting provides slightly lower fueleconomy than 2 m.

Shifts between 2 m, 4 m, and AUTO

Any of these shifts can be made atnormal driving speed.

The actual 4x4 shift request is onlymade after the button is released.The 4x4 graphic will remain flashinguntil the shift request hascompleted. A DIC messagedisplays.

Once the 4x4 shift has completed,the DIC message disappears, the4x4 graphic stops flashing, and thecurrent setting is indicated.

The actual 4x4 shift request is onlymade after the button is released.The 4x4 graphic will remain flashinguntil the shift request hascompleted.

A DIC message displays. Once the4x4 shift has completed, the DICmessage disappears, the 4x4graphic stops flashing, and thecurrent setting is indicated.

Brakes

Electric Brake BoostVehicles equipped with electricbrake boost have hydraulic brakecircuits that are electronicallycontrolled when the brake pedal isapplied during normal operation.The system performs routine testsand turns off within a few minutesafter the vehicle is shutdown. Noisemay be heard during this time. If thebrake pedal is pressed during thetests or when the electric brakeboost system is off, a noticeablechange in pedal force and travelmay be felt. This is normal.

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)The Antilock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent a braking skid andmaintain steering whilebraking hard.

ABS performs a system check whenthe vehicle is first driven.A momentary motor or clicking noise



may be heard while this test is goingon, and the brake pedal may moveslightly. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 140.

ABS does not change the timeneeded to get a foot on the brakepedal and does not alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle ahead,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room ahead to stop,even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly.Hearing or feeling ABS operate isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows steering and braking atthe same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpeven more than braking.

Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The EPB can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition is

off. To prevent draining the battery,avoid repeated cycles of the EPBwhen the engine is not running.

The system has aY or PARK

Electric Parking Brake light, and a 8Service Parking Brake light. SeeElectric Parking Brake Light 0 140andService Electric Parking Brake Light0 140. There are also parkingbrake-related Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages.

Before leaving the vehicle, check fortheY or PARK light to ensure thatthe parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

TheY or PARK light will flash andthen stay on once the EPB is fullyapplied. If theY or PARK lightflashes continuously, then the EPB



is only partially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DICmessage will display. Release theEPB and try to apply it again. If thelight does not come on, or keepsflashing, have the vehicle serviced.Do not drive the vehicle if theY orPARK light is flashing. See yourdealer. See Electric Parking BrakeLight 0 140.

If the 8 light is on, press the EPBswitch and hold it. Continue to holdthe switch until theY or PARK

light remains on. If the 8 lightremains on, see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch ispressed. If the switch is presseduntil the vehicle comes to a stop,the EPB will remain applied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations whenthe vehicle is not moving. This isnormal, and is done to periodicallycheck the correct operation of theEPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, block therear wheels to prevent vehiclemovement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:

1. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

3. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

The EPB is released when theYor PARK light is off.

If the 8 light is on, release the EPBby pressing and holding the EPBswitch. Continue to hold the switchuntil theY or PARK light is off.If either light stays on after releaseis attempted, see your dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

Brake AssistBrake Assist detects rapid brakepedal applications due toemergency braking situations andprovides additional braking toactivate the Antilock Brake System(ABS) if the brake pedal is notpushed hard enough to activateABS normally. Minor noise, brake



pedal pulsation, and/or pedalmovement during this time mayoccur. Continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. Brake Assist disengageswhen the brake pedal is released.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

{ Warning

Do not rely on the HSA feature.HSA does not replace the need topay attention and drive safely.You may not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by this system.Failure to use proper care whendriving may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 187.

When the vehicle is stopped on agrade, Hill Start Assist (HSA)prevents the vehicle from rolling inan unintended direction during thetransition from brake pedal releaseto accelerator pedal apply. Thebrakes release when the acceleratorpedal is applied. If the acceleratorpedal is not applied within a fewminutes, the Electric Parking Brakewill apply. The brakes may alsorelease under other conditions. Donot rely on HSA to hold the vehicle.

HSA is available when the vehicle isfacing uphill in a forward gear,or when facing downhill inR (Reverse). The vehicle mustcome to a complete stop on a gradefor HSA to activate.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system. These systems help limitwheel spin and assist the driver inmaintaining control, especially onslippery road conditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak/ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the



intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 308.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak/ESCbegins to limit wheel spin, cruisecontrol will disengage. Cruisecontrol may be turned back on whenroad conditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 199and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

When the transfer case (if equipped)is in Four-Wheel Drive Low, thestability system is automaticallydisabled, g comes on, and theappropriate message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).Both traction control and StabiliTrak/ESC are automatically disabled inthis condition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), and

d comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.


Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On



The button for TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC is on the center stack.

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The traction off light idisplays in the instrument cluster.The appropriate message willdisplay in the DIC. To turn TCS onagain, press and release g. Thetraction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and hold g until the

traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g comeon and stay on in the instrument

cluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC onagain, press and release g. Thetraction off light i and the

StabiliTrak/ESC OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak/ESC will automaticallyturn on if the vehicle exceeds56 km/h (35 mph). Traction controlwill remain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 308 orHill Start Assist (HSA) 0 235.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 329.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, Hill Descent Control(HDC) sets and maintains vehiclespeed while driving down steepgrades in a forward or reverse gear.The HDC switch is on the centerstack, below the climate controls.

Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

When enabled, the HDC lightdisplays on the instrument cluster.

A blinking HDC light indicates thesystem is actively applying thebrakes to maintain vehicle speed.HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 1 and 22 km/h (1 and14 mph) on grades greater than orequal to 10%.



If HDC is to be used for more thanthree minutes or on grades steeperthan 25%, the transfer case shouldbe put into Four-Wheel Drive Low(4 n) to reduce the possibility ofbrake overheating.

Noise from the Electronic BrakeControl Module (EBCM) is normalwhen HDC is active.

When HDC is activated, the initialHDC speed is set to the currentdriving speed. It can be increased ordecreased by pressing +RES orSET- on the steering wheel, or byapplying the accelerator or brakepedal. This adjusted speedbecomes the new set speed.

HDC will remain enabled between30 and 60 km/h (19 and 37 mph);however, vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range. HDCwill automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds.

5 must be pressed again tore-enable HDC. HDC may disableafter an extended period of use.

If this happens, HDC will requiretime to cool down. The length oftime HDC remains active dependson road conditions, grade, setspeed, vehicle loading, and outsidetemperature.

When enabled, if the vehicle speedis above 30 km/h (19 mph) andbelow 60 km/h (37 mph), a DICmessage will display.

Driver Mode ControlThis feature adds a sportier feel,provides a more comfortable ride,or assists in different weatherconditions or terrain. Depending onthe option package, availablefeatures, and mode selected; thesuspension, steering, andpowertrain will change settings toachieve the desired modecharacteristics. If the vehicle isequipped with magnetic ride control,selecting the various Driver Modesenhances the ride performance forthe road conditions and theselected mode.

Mode availability is dependent uponvehicle trim level, region, andoptional features.

Not all drive modes are availableon. 1500 series vehicles may haveNormal, Sport, Off Road, Terrain,and Tow Haul. 2500/3500 seriesvehicles may have Normal, OffRoad, and Tow/Haul.

Mode Activation

To activate and deactivate Tow/Haulturn the Drive Mode knob to the left.For activation of modes other thanTow/Haul, turn the Drive Mode knobto the right.



Vehicles with the MODE graphic onthe knob will have a menu selectionscreen in the instrument cluster toselect the desired mode. When theDrive Mode knob is turned to theright, the mode list will display andactivate the next available mode.

If equipped, select Terrain Mode bypressing theg below the 4 mtransfer case button.

Modes:

Normal Mode : Use for normal cityand highway driving to provide asmooth, soft ride. This modeprovides a balanced settingbetween comfort and handling. Thisis the standard mode and whenselected, there is no indicator in theinstrument cluster.

8 Sport Mode : Use where roadconditions or personal preferencedemand a more controlledresponse.

When you enter this mode you willimmediately feel a down shift. In thismode, the vehicle also monitorsdriving behaviors and automaticallyenables Performance Shift Featureswhen spirited driving is detected.These features maintain lowertransmission gears to increaseavailable engine braking andimprove acceleration response. Thevehicle will exit these features andreturn to normal operation after ashort period when no spirited drivingis detected. The steering willchange to provide more precisecontrol. If the vehicle has MagneticRide Control, the suspension willchange to provide better corneringperformance.

When selected, the Sport Mode lightdisplays in the instrument cluster.

7 Off-Road Mode : Use toimprove driving at moderate speeds,on grass, gravel, dirt, unpavedroads, or snow-covered roads thathave not been groomed or plowed.

The accelerator pedal will be moresensitive to provide finer control ofthe torque at the wheels.



StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), and the TractionControl System (TCS) will changefor optimal off-road performance.Use this mode for public off-roadrecreational driving. See Off-RoadDriving 0 191.

When selected, the Off-Road Modeindicator light displays in theinstrument cluster.

_ Tow/Haul Mode : This featureassists when pulling a heavy traileror a heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 227.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle’s GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing 0 292.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whenpulling a heavy trailer or a heavyload under the following conditions:

. Through rolling terrain

. In stop-and-go traffic

. In busy parking lots whereimproved low speed control ofthe vehicle is desired

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit toselecting Tow/Haul Mode when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristics,heavy or light steering, and reducedfuel economy.

When selected, the Tow/Haul Modelight will display in the instrumentcluster.

If the vehicle is turned off with Tow/Haul Mode active and then restartedwithin four hours or less, Tow/Haulwill remain active. Otherwise thevehicle will start in Normal Mode.

g Terrain Mode : Use for finercontrol during low speed, off-roaddriving. When using this mode it willmimic the characteristics offour-wheel-drive low (4 n) withoutthe torque capabilities.

Use when:

. Traveling on very rough roads atvery low speeds, such as atwo-track or heavily rutted road.

. Traveling slowly in grassy fields.

. Pulling a boat out of the wateron a trailer.

. Using the vehicle for publicoff-road recreational driving. SeeOff-Road Driving 0 191 andHill and Mountain Roads 0 197.

When in Terrain Mode, the vehiclewill shift automatically but may holda lower gear longer to maximizeengine torque. The steering willchange to provide more precisecontrol. A unique pedal map,transmission shift pattern, and rpmcontrol are utilized to give bettercontrol at lower speeds and overrough terrain. When the vehiclecomes to a stop, Vehicle Hold isengaged. TCS will be optimized formaximum torque transfer acrossaxles, and Active Braking During LiftThrottle will be engaged.



Active Braking During Lift Throttle:

. Automatically applies lightbraking, similar to heavy enginebraking of four-wheel-drive low.

. Applies light braking in D (Drive)until the vehicle is at idlespeeds. In Manual L1 andManual L2, moderate brakingmay stop the vehicle.

. Reduces trailer braking.

Terrain ModeDrive Select Expected Vehicle Behavior Ideal Terrain

Drive (L3-Lx)

Minor deceleration when offthrottle and mild ability tomodulate throttle; mimicsperformance of 4 n withouttorque multiplication.

Grassy fields,mild two tracks,rutted roads,large rolling hills,

L2

Moderate deceleration whenoff throttle and moderateability to modulate throttle;will bring vehicle to a stop inmost cases.

Mild rock crawling,heavy ruts,short, steeper grades,

L1

Significant deceleration whenoff throttle and significantability to modulate throttle;will bring vehicle to a stop inmost cases.

Rock crawling downhill

Active Braking During Lift Throttlewill reduce the back and forthbetween the accelerator and brakepedals.

Vehicle Hold Features:

. When the vehicle comes to astop on an incline grade inforward gear or on a declinegrade in reverse gear, VehicleHold is engaged until theaccelerator pedal is pressed.


242 Driving and Operating. When the vehicle is in forward

gear on a decline, the vehicle isallowed to creep down the hillwhen the brake pedal isreleased without pressing theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill also creep forward on flatground.

. If the driver seat belt is removedand the driver door is openedwhile the vehicle is being held,EPB will be engaged.

. EPB will engage if the vehicle isheld for an extended period.

Terrain Mode is only available onvehicles equipped with the singlespeed transfer case.

Terrain Mode can only beactive when:

. Vehicle speed is less than80 km/h (50 mph).

. The transfer case is in 4 m.Frequent use of this mode maycause brake wear due to the lightbraking.

The vehicle will automatically exitthe mode if the brakes get too hot.Terrain Mode can be turned back onafter the brakes have cooled.

When Terrain Mode is selected:

. Auto Engine Start/Stop will bedisabled.

. The Terrain Mode indicatordisplays on the instrumentcluster.

Limited-Slip DifferentialIf equipped, the limited-slipdifferential can give more traction onsnow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel.It works like a standard axle most ofthe time, but when traction is low,this feature allows the drive wheelwith the most traction to move thevehicle. For vehicles with thelimited-slip differential, driven undersevere conditions, the rear axle fluidshould be changed. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.



Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about40 km/h (25 mph).

If the cruise control is being usedand the Traction Control System(TCS) or StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control

will automatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 235. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System 0 268. Whenroad conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, cruise control can beturned back on.

Turning off the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage thecruise control.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

5 : Press to turn cruise control onor off. A white indicator comes on oroff in the instrument cluster.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press the control up brieflyto resume to that speed or pressand hold to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already engaged, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET− : Press the control downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready engaged, use to decreasevehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If5 is on when not in use, SET− or+RES could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep 5off when cruise is not being used.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.



3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 126.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or* is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, pressRES+ up briefly. The vehicle returnsto the previously set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

Do one of the following:

. Press and hold +RES up untilthe desired speed is reached,then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press +RESup briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster 0 126.The increment value used dependson the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

Do one of the following:

. Press and hold SET– down untilthe desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, press SET– downbriefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) slower.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruisecontrol set to the current vehiclespeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.

While going downhill, cruise brakinghelps maintain driver selectedspeed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.



It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

For other forms of descent control,see Hill Descent Control (HDC)0 237, Automatic Transmission0 221, and Tow/Haul Mode 0 227.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,press5.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 5 is pressedor the ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise Control(1500 Series)If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) allows the cruise control setspeed and following gap to beselected. Read this entire sectionbefore using this system. Thefollowing gap is the following timebetween your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path,ACC works like regular cruisecontrol. ACC uses a windshieldmounted front camera sensor.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can apply acceleration orlimited, moderate braking tomaintain the selected following gap.To disengage ACC, apply the brake.If ACC is controlling the vehiclespeed when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system activates, ACC mayautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 235. When roadconditions allow ACC to be safely

used, ACC can be turned back on.Disabling the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage andprevent engagement of ACC.

ACC can reduce the need for you tofrequently brake and accelerate,especially when used onexpressways, freeways, andinterstate highways. When used onother roads, you may need to takeover the control of braking oracceleration more often.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking abilityand may not have time to slowthe vehicle down enough to avoida collision with another vehicleyou are following. This can occurwhen vehicles suddenly slow orstop ahead, or enter your lane.Also see “Alerting the Driver” laterin this section. Complete attentionis always required while drivingand you should be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 187.



{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roadsor when the camera sensoris blocked by snow, ice,or dirt. The system may notdetect a vehicle ahead.Keep the windshield andheadlamps clean.

. When visibility is poor dueto rain, snow, fog, dirt,insect residue, or dust;when other foreign objectsobscure the camera’s view;or when the vehicle in frontor oncoming traffic causesadditional environmentalobstructions, such as roadspray. ACC performance islimited under theseconditions.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. On slippery roads wherefast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessivewheel slip

. With extremely heavy cargoloaded in the cargo area orrear seat

. When towing a trailer

J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

RES+ : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or to increasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyactivated. To increase speed byabout 1 km/h (1 mph), press RES+briefly. To increase speed to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer, hold RES+.

SET– : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate ACC or todecrease vehicle speed if ACC isalready activated. To decreasespeed by about 1 km/h (1 mph),press SET– briefly. To decreasespeed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph)mark on the speedometer,hold SET–.

* : Press to disengage ACCwithout erasing the selected setspeed.

[ : Press to select a following gapsetting for ACC of Far, Medium,or Near.




Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

To switch between ACC and regularcruise control, press and hold*.A Driver Information Display (DIC)message displays. See VehicleMessages 0 155.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a greenoindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster and the following gap will bedisplayed. When the regular cruisecontrol is engaged, a green J

indicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster; the following gap will notdisplay.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set tothe last mode used before thevehicle was turned off.

{ Warning

Always check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, thevehicle will not automaticallybrake for other vehicles, whichcould cause a crash if the brakesare not applied manually. You andothers could be seriously injuredor killed.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

If J is on when not in use, SET–/RES+ could be pressed by mistakeand engage ACC when not desired.Keep J off when cruise is notbeing used.

Select the set speed desired forACC. This is the vehicle speedwhen no vehicle is detected inyour path.

While the vehicle is moving, ACCwill not set at a speed less than 25km/h (15 mph), although it can beresumed when driving at lowerspeeds.

To set ACC while moving:

1. Press J.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET–.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle aheadis detected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.



ACC can also be set while thevehicle is stopped if ACC is on andthe brake pedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster. When ACC isturned on, the indicator will be litwhite.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selectingthe set speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the ACC is set at a desired speedand then the brakes are applied,ACC is disengaged without erasingthe set speed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, pressRES+ briefly while moving morethan 5 km/h (5 mph). The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle aheadwas present and moved. See“Approaching and Following aVehicle” later in this section.

Once ACC has resumed, if there isno vehicle ahead, if the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, or if the vehicle hasexited a sharp curve, then thevehicle speed will increase to theset speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC Is ata Set Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET–.Release SET– and theaccelerator pedal. The vehiclewill now cruise at the higherspeed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. TheACC indicator will turn blue onthe instrument cluster.

. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed,then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmaller increments, press RES+briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) faster.

. To increase vehicle speed inlarger increments, hold RES+.While holding RES+, the vehiclespeed increases to the next5 km/h (5 mph) step, thencontinues to increase by 5 km/h(5 mph) at a time.

The set speed can also beincreased while the vehicle isstopped.

. If stopped with the brake pedalapplied, press RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed.


Driving and Operating 249. Pressing RES+ when there is no

longer a vehicle ahead or thevehicle ahead is pulling awayand the brake is not applied withcause the ACC to resume.

When it is determined that there isno vehicle ahead or the vehicleahead is beyond the selectedfollowing gap, then the vehiclespeed will increase to the set speed.

Reducing Speed While ACC Is at aSet Speed

If ACC is already activated, do oneof the following:

. Use the brake to get to thedesired lower speed. Releasethe brake and press SET–. Thevehicle will now cruise at thelower speed.

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmaller increments, press SET−briefly. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h(1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, hold SET−.While holding SET−, the vehiclespeed decreases to the next5 km/h (5 mph) step, thencontinues to decrease by 5 km/h(5 mph) at a time.

The set speed can also bedecreased while the vehicle isstopped.

. If stopped with the brakeapplied, press or hold SET− untilthe desired set speed isdisplayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gapsetting displays briefly on theinstrument cluster. The gap settingwill be maintained until it ischanged.

Since each gap setting correspondsto a following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow avehicle detected ahead. Considertraffic and weather conditions whenselecting the following gap. Therange of selectable gaps may not beappropriate for all drivers anddriving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alerttiming sensitivity (Far, Medium,or Near) for the Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) feature. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 268.



Alerting the Driver

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

If ACC is engaged, driver actionmay be required when ACC cannotapply sufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, six redlights will flash on the windshield.Either eight beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

See Defensive Driving 0 187.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is in theinstrument cluster. It only displayswhen a vehicle is detected in yourvehicle’s path moving in the samedirection. If this symbol is notdisplaying, ACC will not respond toor brake for vehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow a detected vehicle ahead atthe selected following gap. Thevehicle speed increases ordecreases to follow a detectedvehicle in front of your vehicle whenthat vehicle is traveling slower thanyour vehicle set speed. It may applylimited braking, if necessary. Whenbraking is active, the brake lampswill come on. The automatic braking

may feel or sound different than ifthe brakes were applied manually.This is normal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for avehicle it has never detectedmoving. This can occur instop-and-go traffic or when avehicle suddenly appears due toa vehicle ahead changing lanes.Your vehicle may not stop andcould cause a crash. Use cautionwhen using ACC. Your completeattention is always required whiledriving and you should be readyto take action and apply thebrakes.



Irregular Objects Affecting ACC

ACC may have difficulty detectingthe following objects:

. Vehicles in front of your vehiclethat have a rear aspect that islow, small, or irregular

. An empty truck or trailer that hasno cargo in the cargo bed

. Vehicles with cargo extendingfrom the back end

. Non-standard shaped vehicles,such as vehicle transport,vehicles with a side car fitted,or horse carriages

. Vehicles that are low to the roadsurface

. Objects that are close to thefront of your vehicle

. Vehicles on which extremelyheavy cargo is loaded in thecargo area or rear seat

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengageand the driver will need to manuallyapply the brakes to slow thevehicle if:

. The front camera is blocked orvisibility is reduced.

. The Traction Control System(TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC systemhas activated or been disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. A DIC message displays toindicate that ACC is temporarilyunavailable.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

In some cases, when ACC istemporarily unavailable, regularcruise control may be used. See“Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control” previouslyin this section. Always considerdriving conditions before usingeither cruise control system.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a follow gapbehind a detected vehicle and slowyour vehicle to a stop behind thatvehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle aheadindicator will flash as a reminder tocheck traffic ahead beforeproceeding. In addition, the left andright sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse three times, or threebeeps will sound. See ”Alert Type”and “Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

When the vehicle ahead drivesaway, press RES+ or theaccelerator pedal to resume ACC.



If stopped for more thantwo minutes or if the driver door isopened and the driver seat belt isunbuckled, the ACC automaticallyapplies the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPBstatus light will turn on. See ElectricParking Brake 0 233.

A DIC warning message maydisplay indicating to shift to P (Park)before exiting the vehicle. SeeVehicle Messages 0 155.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle,and if ACC is disengaged, turnedoff, or canceled, the vehicle willno longer be held at a stop. Thevehicle can move. When ACC isholding the vehicle at a stop,always be prepared to manuallyapply the brakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle withoutplacing it in P (Park) can bedangerous. Do not leave thevehicle while it is being held at astop by ACC. Always place thevehicle in P (Park) and turn offthe ignition before leaving thevehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicatorturns blue on the instrument clusterindicating ACC braking will notoccur. ACC will resume operationwhen the accelerator pedal is notbeing pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following avehicle exiting or entering exitramps. You could lose control ofthe vehicle or crash. Do not useACC while driving on an entranceor exit ramp. Always be ready touse the brakes if necessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond toa vehicle in another lane, or maynot have time to react to a vehiclein your lane. You could crash intoa vehicle ahead of you, or losecontrol of your vehicle. Give extraattention in curves and be ready

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

to use the brakes if necessary.Select an appropriate speed whiledriving in curves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce thevehicle speed if the curve is toosharp.

When following a vehicle andentering a curve, ACC may notdetect the vehicle ahead andaccelerate to the set speed. Whenthis happens, the vehicle aheadindicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that isnot in your lane and apply thebrakes.

ACC may occasionally provide analert and/or braking that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to vehicles in differentlanes or stationary objects whenentering or exiting a curve. This isnormal operation. The vehicle doesnot need service.

Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Objects Not Directly in Front ofYour Vehicle

The detection of objects in front ofthe vehicle may not be possible if:

. The vehicle or object ahead isnot within your lane.

. The vehicle ahead is shifted, notcentered, or is shifted to oneside of the lane.



Driving in Narrow Lanes

Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes orroadside objects may be incorrectlydetected when located along theroadway.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills andWhen Towing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving onsteep hills or when towing a trailer.ACC will not detect a vehicle in thelane while driving on steep hills.If the brakes are applied, ACCdisengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Press J.

Erasing Speed Memory

The ACC set speed is erased frommemory if J is pressed or if theignition is turned off.

Weather Conditions Affecting ACC

If the interior temperature isextremely high, the instrumentcluster may indicate that ACC istemporarily unavailable. This can becaused by extreme hot weatherconditions with direct sunlight on thefront camera. ACC will return tonormal operation once the cabintemperature is lower.

Conditions that are associated withlow visibility, such as fog, rain,snow, or road spray, may limit ACCperformance. Water droplets fromrain or snow that remain on thewindshield may also limit ACC’sability to detect objects.

Lighting Conditions Affecting ACC

The ACC front camera can beaffected by poor lighting conditions,and ACC may have limitedperformance when:

. There are changes in brightness,such as entering and exitingtunnels, bridges, andoverpasses.

. Low sun angles cause thecamera to not detect objects,or it is more difficult to detectobjects in the same traffic lane.

. Lighting is poor in the evening orearly morning

. There are multiple changes inbrightness or shadows along thevehicle roadway.

. In a tunnel without theheadlamps on, or in a tunnelwhen there is a vehicle in frontthat does not have itstaillamps on.


Driving and Operating 255. Subjected to strong light from

opposing lane traffic in the frontof the vehicle, such ashigh-beam headlamps fromoncoming traffic.

Accessory Installations andVehicle Modifications

Do not install or place any objectaround the front camera windshieldarea that would obstruct the frontcamera view.

Do not install objects on top of thevehicle that overhang and obstructthe front camera, such as a canoe,kayak, or other items that can betransported on the vehicle roof.

Do not modify the hood, headlamps,or fog lamps, as this may limit thecamera’s ability to detect an object.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on thewindshield behind the rearviewmirror can become blocked bysnow, ice, dirt, mud, or debris. Thisarea needs to be cleaned for ACCto operate properly.

The vehicle headlamps may need tobe cleaned due to dirt, snow, or ice.Objects that are not illuminatedcorrectly may be difficult to detect.

If ACC will not operate, regularcruise control may be available. See“Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control” previouslyin this section. Always considerdriving conditions before usingeither cruise control system.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care 0 429.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Driving0 187.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect children,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitoredby the system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide youwith enough time to avoid acrash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as witha sticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization0 156.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. Driver

Information Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.


Driving and Operating 257. Front and rear bumpers and the

area below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirror

. Side camera lens on the bottomof the outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera in thetailgate handle

. Rear Camera Mirror and CargoView Camera in the CenterHigh-Mounted Stoplamp

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Surround Vision, Rear ParkAssist (RPA), Front Park Assist(FPA), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) may help the driver park or

avoid objects. Always check aroundthe vehicle when parking orbacking.

The RVC, RPA, and SurroundVision will not work properly if thetailgate is down. If the tailgate isdown, do not use these systems.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or, while in D(Drive), reach a vehicle speed ofapproximately 12 km/h (8 mph). Therear vision camera is in the tailgatehandle.

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

1. View Displayed by the RearVision Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper



Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that Rear Park Assist (RPA)has detected an object. This trianglechanges from amber to red andincreases in size the closer theobject.

If equipped with Hitch View, see“Surround Vision” following.

Surround Vision

If equipped the Surround Visionsystem can display various viewssurrounding the vehicle in theinfotainment display. See below forcamera view descriptions and moreinformation.

{ Warning

The Surround Vision camerashave blind spots and will notdisplay all objects near thecorners of the vehicle. Foldingoutside mirrors that are out ofposition may not display surroundview correctly. Always checkaround the vehicle when parkingor backing.

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Camera Views

Touch the camera view buttonsalong the bottom of the infotainmentdisplay to access each view (ifequipped):

1. Front/Rear Standard View

Displays an image of thearea in front or behind thevehicle. To select, touchFront/Rear Standard Viewon the infotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. Touch the button totoggle between front andrear camera views.

When the hitch guidance isselected, Rear StandardView will remain visibleacross gear changes,otherwise the view willtoggle between Front andRear Standard View basedon gear position.

If equipped, the front viewcamera also displays whenthe Park Assist systemdetects an object within30 cm (12 in).

2. Front/Rear Overhead View

Displays a front or rearoverhead view of thevehicle. To select, touchFront/Rear Top-Down View

on the infotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. Touch the button totoggle between front andrear camera views.

3. Rear Bowl View

Displays a perspective viewof the vehicle from the frontlooking rearward. To select,touch Rear Bowl View onthe infotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. Park Assist andRear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) overlays are notavailable when bowl view isactive.

4. Front/Rear side View

Displays a view that showsobjects next to the front orrear sides of the vehicle. Toselect, touch Front/RearSide View on theinfotainment display when acamera view is active.Touch the button to togglebetween front and rearcamera views. Park Assist



and RCTA overlays are notavailable when Front/RearSide View is active.

The Turn Signal ActivatedView works with Rear SideView to provide a rearwardview of the left or right sideof the vehicle and trailer.Views are provided basedon turn signal activationwith the right-side viewbeing shown when the rightturn signal is active and theleft side view being shownwhen the left turn signal isactive. The feature isavailable when a trailer isconnected. The feature canbe enabled or disabled.See Vehicle Personalization0 156. Touch X to exit.

5. Surround View

Displays an image of thearea surrounding thevehicle. Surround View isavailable as part of theFront/Rear Standard Views,the Front/Rear Top-DownViews and the Front/Rear

Side Views. In these viewsSurround View can beenabled by touchingSurround View on theinfotainment display whenthe camera view is active.

6. Guidance Lines/HitchGuidance

Guidance Lines displaysavailable guidelines,including Standard andHitch Guidance.A grayed-out icon indicatesthat guidelines are notavailable. To enable, touchGuidance Lines on theinfotainment display when acamera view is active.Touching the buttonmultiple times will togglethrough StandardGuidelines, Hitch Guidanceand no guidelines.Standard guidelines areavailable in Front/RearStandard Views, Front/RearTop-Down Views andSurround View.

Hitch Guidance displays asingle centered guidelineon the infotainment displayto assist with aligning thevehicle’s hitch ball with atrailer coupler. Touch theHitch Guidance icon, thenalign the trailer guidanceline over the trailer coupler.Continuously steer thevehicle to keep theguideline centered on thecoupler when backing. ParkAssist overlays will notdisplay when the trailerguidance line is active.Hitch Guidance is availablein Rear Standard View.

{ Warning

Use Hitch Guidance only to helpback the vehicle to a trailer hitchor, when traveling above 12 km/h(8 mph), to briefly check thestatus of your trailer. Do not usefor any other purpose, such asmaking lane change decisions.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Before making a lane change,always check the mirrors andglance over your shoulder.Improper use could result inserious injury to you or others.

7. Interior Trailer View

Provides a view of theinterior of the trailer. Thefeature is available when atrailer is connected. Thefeature requires userinstallation of an accessorytrailer camera on theinterior of the trailer per theaccessory trailer camerainstallation instructions (seeyour dealer for accessorytrailer camera(s) andinformation). To select,touch Interior Trailer Viewon the infotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. To access this viewwhen in a forward gearabove 12 km/h (8 mph),

touch CAMERA on theinfotainment display andtouch the Interior TrailerView icon. The view willclose after 8 seconds andcan be closed early bytouching X.

8. Hitch View

Assists with connecting to atrailer by providing azoomed-in view of the hitchto help align the vehicle’shitch ball with the trailercoupler, or to monitor thetrailer connection. To select,touch Hitch View on theinfotainment display when acamera view is active. Toaccess this view when in aforward gear above 12 km/h(8 mph), touch CAMERA onthe infotainment displayand touch the Cargo BedView icon. The view willclose after 8 seconds andcan be closed early bytouching X. Shifting intoP (Park) while in this view

will automatically engagethe Electric ParkingBrake (EPB).

9. Bed View

Provides a view of the truckbed and the area behindthe vehicle to assist incargo or hitch monitoring orhitching to a fifth wheel orgooseneck trailer. To select,touch Bed View on theinfotainment display when acamera view is active. Toaccess this view when in aforward gear above 12 km/h(8 mph), touch CAMERA onthe infotainment displayand touch the Bed Viewicon. The view will closeafter 8 seconds and can beclosed early by touching X.

10. Transparent Trailer View

Provides a view that allowsthe driver to virtually “seethrough” the trailer. Thefeature is available when acompatible trailer isconnected and a profile isconfigured and selected via



the Trailering App. SeeTrailering App 0 310. Thefeature requires userinstallation of an accessorytrailer camera on the rearexterior surface of thetrailer per the accessorytrailer camera installationinstructions (see yourdealer for accessory trailercamera(s) and information).To select, touchTransparent Trailer View onthe infotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. To access this viewwhen in a forward gearabove 12 km/h (8 mph),touch CAMERA on theinfotainment display andtouch the TransparentTrailer View icon. Touch Xto exit.

When the system iscalibrated and the trailerposition is known, one ofthree views will be shown;Transparent Trailer View,Left Transparent TrailerView or Right Transparent

Trailer View. TheTransparent Trailer View isshown when the position ofthe trailer is relativelystraight behind the vehicle.The Left or RightTransparent Trailer View isshown when the position ofthe trailer is too far to theleft or right. When thesystem is not calibrated ortrailer position is not knownthe Transparent TrailerPicture-in-Picture View willbe shown.

11. Rear Trailer View/Rear SideView with AvailableArticulation Functionality/Picture-in-Picture Side View

. Rear Trailer Viewprovides a view of thearea behind the trailer.the feature is availablewhen a trailer isconnected. The featurerequires user installationof an accessory trailercamera on the rearexterior surface of the

trailer per the accessorytrailer camerainstallation instructions(see your dealer foraccessory trailercamera(s) andinformation). To select,touch Rear Trailer View/Rear Side View withAvailable ArticulationFunctionality/Picture-in-Pictue SideView on theinfotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. Each touch willtoggle through the RearTrailer View, Trailer TowMirror View and ComboView. To access thisview when in a forwardgear above 12 km/h(8 mph), touchCAMERA on theinfotainment display andtouch the Interior RearTrailer View/Rear SideView with AvailableArticulationFunctionality/



Picture-in-Picture SideView icon. Touch Xto exit.

. Rear Side View withAvailable ArticulationFunctionality provides arearward split view ofthe left and right sidesof the vehicle and trailer.When in a forward gearthe view wellautomatically pan toshow more of the left orright side based on theposition of the trailer.The feature is availablewhen a trailer isconnected. To select,touch Rear trailer View/Rear Side View withAvailable ArticulationFunctionality/Picture-in-Picture SideView on theinfotainment displaywhen a camera view isactive. Each touch willtoggle through the RearTrailer View, trailer towMirror view and Combo

View. To access thisview when in a forwardgear above 12 km/h(8 mph), TouchCAMERA on theinfotainment display andtouch the Rear TrailerView/Rear Side Viewwith AvailableArticulationFunctionality/Picture-in-Picture Sideicon. Touch X to exit.

. Provides a rearwardsplit view of the left andright sides of the vehicleand trailer with anoverlay view of the areabehind the trailer. Thefeature is availablewhen a trailer isconnected. the featurerequires user installationof an accessory trailercamera on the rearexterior surface of thetrailer per the accessorytrailer camerainstallation instructions(see your dealer for

accessory trailercamera(s) andinformation). To select,touch Rear Trailer View/Rear Side View withAvailable ArticulationFunctionality/Picture-in-Picture Sideview on the infotainmentdisplay when a cameraview is active. Eachpress of the button willtoggle through the RearTrailer View, Trailer Towmirror View and ComboView. To access thisview when in a forwardgear above 12 km/h(8 mph), touchCAMERA on theinfotainment display andtouch the Rear TrailerView/Rear Side Viewwith AvailableArticulationFunctionality/Picture-in-Picture SideView icon. Touch Xto exit.



HD Surround Vision with TrailerCamera Provisions

If equipped, this feature providesadditional views to aid in trailering/towing. The system shows multipleviews in the infotainment displayusing five cameras mounted aroundthe vehicle and up to two additionalaccessory cameras that can bemounted on or in a trailer. The frontcamera is in the grille under thefront emblem, the side cameras areon the bottom of the outside mirrors,the rear camera is in the tailgatehandle and the bed camera ismounted on the rear of the cab.Additionally, up to two accessorycameras can be mounted to the rearand/or interior of the trailer. Seeyour dealer for accessory trailercameras. To access, touchCAMERA on the infotainmentdisplay or shift to R (Reverse). Toreturn to the previous screen whennot in reverse, touch the Home orBack buttons on the infotainmentdisplay.

Available camera views:

. Front/Rear Standard View

. Front/Rear Top-Down View

. Rear Bowl View

. Front/Rear Side View

. Hitch View

. Bed View

. Rear trailer View

. Rear Side view with a availablearticulation functionality

. Picture-in-Picture Side View

. Interior Trailer View

. Transparent trailer View

. Surround View

. Guidance Lines

. Hitch Guidance

Surround Vision (360 Degrees)

If equipped, the Surround Visionsystem can display various viewssurrounding the vehicle in theinfotainment display using fourcameras mounted around thevehicle. The front camera is in the

grille under the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom ofthe outside mirrors, and the rearcamera is in the tailgate handle.

The Surround Vision system can beaccessed by selecting CAMERA inthe infotainment display or when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).To return to the previous screensooner, when not in R (Reverse),press the Home or Back button onthe infotainment system, shift intoP (Park), or, while in D (Drive),reach a vehicle speed ofapproximately 12 km/h (8 mph).


. Front/Rear Standard View

. Front/Rear Top-Down View

. Rear Bowl View

. Front/Rear Side View

. Hitch View

. Surround View

. Guidance Lines

. Hitch Guidance



Surround Vision

If equipped, this feature provides,additional views to aid in trailering/towing. The Front Vision Cameraand Surround Vision cameras arenot supported. The system canshow various views in theinfotainment display using camerasmounted in and around the vehicleand trailer. The rear camera is in thetailgate handle and the cargo bedcamera is mounted on the rear ofthe cab. Up to two accessorycameras can be mounted to the rearand/or interior of the trailer. Seeyour dealer for these accessorycameras.

The system can be accessed byselecting CAMERA in theinfotainment display or when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).To return to the previous screensooner, when not in R (Reverse),press the Home or Back button onthe infotainment system or shift intoP (Park).


. Rear Standard View

. Hitch View

. Bed View

. Rear Trailer View

. Interior Trailer View

. Guidance Lines

. Hitch Guidance

Troubleshooting

The Transparent Trailer calibrationmay take longer than expected ornot calibrate if:

. The vehicle is driven too fastduring calibration. Speed shouldbe maintained below 50 km/h(31 mph).

. The vehicle is not driven straightduring calibration. Steeringshould be maintained as straightas possible, excessive steeringduring calibration may extendcalibration time.

. The calibration is attempted inlow light. Calibration should beattempted when there is enoughlight.

. The calibration is attemptedduring adverse weatherconditions. Calibration duringconditions such as snow orheavy rain should be avoided.

. The road surface is not ideal forcalibration. Calibration should beattempted on an alternate roadsurface.

. The accessory trailer camerasare swapped at the hitchconnector. Ensure that thecamera mounted to the rear ofthe trailer is connected to therear trailer camera input.

. The accessory trailer camera ismounted, angled or rotatedoutside of the defined mountinglocation (see camera installationinstructions).



Distortion may be observed in thecalibrated Transparent TrailerView if:

. The accessory trailer camera ismounted, angled or rotatedoutside of the defined mountinglocation (see camera installationinstructions).

The Transparent Trailer icon mayappear grayed out if:

. A compatible trailer profile is notconfigured or a non-compatibletrailer profile is selected.

. The vehicle is in R (Reverse).

. The trailer is not connected.

. The accessory rear trailercamera is not connected orconnected to the incorrect input.

The preview may not be provided orthe wrong preview may beprovided if:

. The accessory cameras are notrecognized. Ensure that theaccessory camera(s) areconnected and power cycle thevehicle.

. The accessory trailer camerasare swapped at the hitchconnector. Ensure that theaccessory camera(s) areconnected to the correct input.

. The accessory trailer camera(s)are connected to the correctcamera input.

. The accessory trailer camera(s)are not installed according to theinstallation instructions.

A feature may be unavailable or notactivating as expected if:

. The customization is disabled.Check the customization settingswhere applicable.

. The accessory trailer camerasare swapped at the hitchconnector. Ensure that theaccessory camera(s) areconnected to the correct camerainput.

A view may switch automatically if:

. The vehicle is shifted toanother gear.

Park Assist

With Front and Rear Park Assist, asthe vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers may detect objects upto 1.2 m (4 ft) in front and 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the groundand below bumper level. Thesedetection distances may be shorterduring warmer or humid weather.Blocked sensors will not detectobjects and can also cause falsedetections. Keep the sensors cleanof mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush;and clean sensors after a car washin freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withPark Assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.

The instrument cluster may have aPark Assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the Frontand Rear Park Assist system. Asthe object gets closer, more barslight up and the bars change colorfrom yellow to amber to red.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close— <0.4 m (1.5 ft) in the vehicle rearor <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front—a continuous beep will sound fromthe rear or front depending onobject location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for FPA are higherpitched than for RPA.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), RCTAshows a red warning triangle with aleft or right pointing arrow on theinfotainment display to warn oftraffic coming from the left or right.This system detects objects comingfrom up to 20 m (65 ft) from the leftor right side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either threebeeps sound from the left or right orthree Safety Alert Seat pulses occuron the left or right side, dependingon the direction of the detectedvehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend outfrom the back of the vehicle do notmove further back when a trailer istowed.

RCTA is disabled when the trailerconnection status is displayed.

RCTA can be turned off. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

Turning the Features On or Off

PressX on the center stack toturn on or off the Front and RearPark Assist. The indicator light nextto the button comes on when thefeatures are on and turns off whenthe features have been disabled.



Front and Rear Park Assist can beturned Off, On, or On with Towbar.See “Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization 0 156. If Park Assistis turned off through vehiclepersonalization, the Park Assistbutton will be disabled. To turn ParkAssist on again, select On in vehiclepersonalization. The On with Towbarsetting allows Park Assist to workproperly with a trailer hitch. Somelarger trailer hitches may not becompatible.

Turn off Park Assist when towing atrailer.

To turn the RPA symbols on or off,see “Rear Camera Park AssistSymbols” under VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle in a forward gear, ForwardCollision Alert (FCA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), LaneKeep Assist (LKA), Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), Lane Change Alert

(LCA), Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB), and/or the FrontPedestrian Braking (FPB) Systemcan help to avoid a crash or reducecrash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 8 km/h (5 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails,bridges, construction barrels,or other objects. Be ready to takeaction and apply the brakes. SeeDefensive Driving 0 187.

FCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.



Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected,the vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay green. Vehicles may not bedetected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, due to poor visibility;or if a vehicle ahead is partiallyblocked by pedestrians or otherobjects. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert



When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.



Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near.The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DIC.Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the farther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alert

timing. The range of selectable alerttimings may not be appropriate forall drivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the followinggap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

Following Distance Indicator

The following distance to a movingvehicle ahead in your path isindicated in following time inseconds on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The minimumfollowing time is 0.5 seconds away.If there is no vehicle detectedahead, or the vehicle ahead is out ofsensor range, dashes will bedisplayed.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correctthe issue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of therearview mirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has AEB (1500series only), which includesIntelligent Brake Assist (IBA). Whenthe system detects a vehicle aheadin your path that is traveling in thesame direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can helpavoid or lessen the severity ofcrashes when driving in a forwardgear. Depending on the situation,the vehicle may automatically brake



moderately or hard. This automaticemergency braking can only occur ifa vehicle is detected. This is shownby the FCA vehicle ahead indicatorbeing lit. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 268.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).It can detect vehicles up toapproximately 60 m (197 ft).

{ Warning

AEB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Donot rely on AEB to brake thevehicle. AEB will not brakeoutside of its operating speedrange and only responds todetected vehicles.

AEB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect all vehicles,especially vehicles with atrailer, tractors, muddyvehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if itis partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

AEB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, AEBmay engage the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at astop. Release the EPB or firmlypress the accelerator pedal.

{ Warning

AEB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override AEB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providinga boost to braking based on thespeed of approach and distance toa vehicle ahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the brake pedal shouldcontinue to be applied as needed.IBA will automatically disengageonly when the brake pedal isreleased.



{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle brakingin situations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

AEB and IBA can be disabled. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

{ Warning

Using AEB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert or Offwhen towing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The AEB system does not needservice.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) System (1500Series)If equipped, the FPB system mayhelp avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes withnearby pedestrians when driving ina forward gear. FPB displays anamber indicator, ~, when a nearbypedestrian is detected ahead. Whenapproaching a detected pedestriantoo quickly, FPB provides a redflashing alert on the windshield andrapidly beeps or pulses the driverseat. FPB can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This system includesIntelligent Brake Assist (IBA), andthe Automatic Emergency Braking(AEB) system may also respond topedestrians. See AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) 0 270.

The FPB system can detect andalert to pedestrians in a forwardgear at speeds between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).During daytime driving, the systemdetects pedestrians up to a distanceof approximately 40 m (131 ft).During nighttime driving, systemperformance is very limited.

{ Warning

FPB does not provide an alert orautomatically brake the vehicle,unless it detects a pedestrian.FPB may not detect pedestrians,including children:

. When the pedestrian is notdirectly ahead, fully visible,or standing upright, or whenpart of a group.

. Due to poor visibility,including nighttimeconditions, fog, rain,or snow.

. If the FPB sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. If the headlamps orwindshield are not cleanedor in proper condition.

Be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving 0 187.Keep the windshield, headlamps,and FPB sensor clean and ingood repair.

FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alertand Brake through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 156.

Detecting the PedestrianAhead

FPB alerts and automatic brakingwill not occur unless the FPBsystem detects a pedestrian. Whena nearby pedestrian is detected infront of the vehicle, the pedestrianahead indicator will display amber.

Front Pedestrian Alert



When the vehicle approaches apedestrian ahead too rapidly, thered FPB alert display will flash onthe windshield. Eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.

When this Pedestrian Alert occurs,the brake system may prepare fordriver braking to occur more rapidlywhich can cause a brief, milddeceleration. Continue to apply thebrake pedal as needed. Cruisecontrol may be disengaged whenthe Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.

Automatic Braking

If FPB detects it is about to crashinto a pedestrian ahead, and thebrakes have not been applied, FPBmay automatically brake moderatelyor brake hard. This can help toavoid some very low speedpedestrian crashes or reducepedestrian injury. FPB canautomatically brake to detectedpedestrians between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph). Automaticbraking levels may be reducedunder certain conditions, such ashigher speeds.

If this happens, Automatic Brakingmay engage the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at astop. Release the EPB. A firm press



of the accelerator pedal will alsorelease Automatic Braking andthe EPB.

{ Warning

FPB may alert or automaticallybrake the vehicle suddenly insituations where it is unexpectedand undesired. It could falselyalert or brake for objects similar inshape or size to pedestrians,including shadows. This is normaloperation and the vehicle doesnot need service. To overrideAutomatic Braking, firmly pressthe accelerator pedal, if it is safeto do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 156.

{ Warning

Using the Front PedestrianBraking system while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.Turn the system to Alert or Offwhen towing a trailer.

Cleaning the System

If FPB does not seem to operateproperly, cleaning the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror may correct the issue.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas.When the vehicle is in a forwardgear, the left or right side mirrordisplay will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blindzone. If the turn signal is activated

and a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashas an extra warning not to changelanes. Since this system is part ofthe Lane Change Alert (LCA)system, read the entire LCA sectionbefore using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding lane changecrashes that occur with movingvehicles in the side blind zone (orspot) areas or with vehicles rapidlyapproaching these areas frombehind. The LCA warning displaywill light up in the correspondingoutside side mirror and will flash ifthe turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may not

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

provide alerts when changinglanes under all driving conditions.Failure to use proper care whenchanging lanes may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Before making a lane change,always check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. TheSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)warning area starts at approximatelythe middle of the vehicle and goesback 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are alsowarned of vehicles rapidlyapproaching from up to 25 m (82 ft)behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blindzone or rapidly approaching thatzone from behind. A lit LCA symbolindicates it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the LCA display,check mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthe next lane over in that blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone.If the turn signal is activated in thesame direction as a detectedvehicle, this display will flash as anextra warning not to change lanes.

LCA is disabled when the trailerconnection status is displayed.A DIC message may display. TheSBZA system still operates.

LCA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. When youdisable LCA, SBZA is also disabled.



See Vehicle Personalization 0 156.If LCA is disabled by the driver, theLCA mirror displays will not light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires somedriving for the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic androadside objects (e.g., guardrails,barriers).

LCA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle.Attached objects may also interfere

with the detection of vehicles. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not always alert the driverto vehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due toguardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, andother non-moving objects. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 429.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaningboth sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in theside blind zone or are rapidlyapproaching this zone and thesystem is clean, the system mayneed service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.

Radio Frequency Information

See Radio Frequency Statement0 472.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) (2500/3500 Series)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markingsat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. It may provide an alert if thevehicle is crossing a lane withoutusing a turn signal in that direction.LDW light will not alert if the turnsignal is active in the direction oflane departure, or if LDW detectsthat you are accelerating, braking oractively steering.



{ Warning

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle. The LDW systemmay not:

. Provide enough time toavoid a crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked bydirt, snow, or ice; if they arenot in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarking. Always keep your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LDW inbad weather conditions.


LDW utilizes a camera sensorinstalled on the windshield ahead ofthe rearview mirror to detect lanemarkings.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When LDW is on, @ is green ifLDW is available to warn of a lanedeparture. If the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking without usingthe turn signal in that direction, @changes to amber and flashes.Additionally, there will be threebeeps, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection. LDW will not alert if theturn signal is active in the directionof lane departure or if LDA detectsthat you are accelerating, braking oractively steering.


The system may not detect lanes aswell when there are:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.


278 Driving and Operating. Banked roads.

If the LDW system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.

LDW alerts may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LDW off if theseconditions continue.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)(1500 Series)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. This system uses acamera to detect lane markingsbetween 60 km/h (37 mph) and180 km/h (112 mph). It may assistby gently turning the steering wheelif the vehicle approaches a detectedlane marking. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert if the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking. LKA can be

overridden by turning the steeringwheel. This system is not intendedto keep the vehicle centered in thelane. LKA will not assist and alert ifthe turn signal is active in thedirection of lane departure, or if itdetects that you are accelerating,braking or actively steering.

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if alane marking is detected.

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid alane departure or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield orheadlamps are blocked by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

dirt, snow, or ice; if they arenot in proper condition; or ifthe sun shines directly intothe camera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it willonly assist or provide an LDWalert when approaching the laneon the side where it has detecteda lane marking. Even with LKAand LDW, you must steer thevehicle. Always keep yourattention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

bad weather conditions or onroads with unclear lane markings,such as construction zones.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a traileror on slippery roads could causeloss of control of the vehicle anda crash. Turn the system off.


LKA uses a camera sensor installedon the windshield ahead of therearview mirror to detect lanemarkings. It may provide briefsteering assist if it detects anunintended lane departure. It mayfurther provide an audible alert orthe driver seat may pulse indicatingthat a lane marking has beencrossed.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack. If equipped, theindicator light on the button comeson when LKA is on and turns offwhen LKA is disabled.

When on,A is white, if equipped,indicating that the system is notready to assist.A is green if LKAis ready to assist. LKA may assistby gently turning the steering wheelif the vehicle approaches a detectedlane marking.A is amber whenassisting. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)alert by flashingA amber if thevehicle crosses a detected lanemarking. Additionally, there may bethree beeps, or the driver seat maypulse three times, on the right orleft, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.If LKA does not detect active driversteering, an alert and chime may beprovided. Steer the vehicle todismiss. LKA may becometemporarily unavailable afterrepeated take steering alerts.


The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, suchas when driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning thewindshield may help.



A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.Some driver assistance systemsmay have reduced performance ornot work at all. An LKA or LDWunavailable message may display ifthe systems are temporarilyunavailable. This message could bedue to a blocked camera. The LKAsystem does not need service.Clean the outside of the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks,shadows, cracks in the road,temporary or construction lanemarkings, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline to keepthe engine clean, reduce enginedeposits, and maintain optimalvehicle performance. Look for theTOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended Fuel(Except 6.2L V8 Engine)For diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel capor a yellow sticker on the fuel door,E85 or FlexFuel can be used. If thevehicle does not have a yellow fuelcap or yellow sticker, do not usegasoline with ethanol levels greaterthan 15% by volume. See E85 orFlexFuel 0 282.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 —(R+M)/2 — or higher. Do not usegasoline with a posted octane ratingof less than 87, as this may causeengine knock and will lower fueleconomy.



Recommended Fuel (6.2LV8 Engine)

Premium unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 93 —(R+M)/2 — is highly recommendedfor best performance and fueleconomy. Unleaded gasoline withan octane rated as low as 87 can beused. Using unleaded gasolinerated below 93 octane, however, willlead to reduced acceleration andfuel economy. If knocking occurs,use a gasoline rated at 93 octaneas soon as possible, otherwise, theengine could be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a 93 octane rating, theengine needs service.

Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol byvolume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16–50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal,ferrocene, and aniline.These fuels can corrodemetal fuel system parts ordamage plastic and rubberparts.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see ProhibitedFuels 0 281.



Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline ishighly recommended for use withyour vehicle. If your country doesnot have TOP TIER DetergentGasoline, add ACDelco FuelSystem Treatment Plus−Gasoline tothe vehicle’s gasoline fuel tank atevery oil change or 15 000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline andACDelco Fuel System TreatmentPlus−Gasoline will help keep yourvehicle’s engine fuel deposit freeand performing optimally.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel stickeron the fuel door can use eitherunleaded gasoline or fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85). All othervehicles should use only theunleaded gasoline as described inRecommended Fuel (Except 6.2LV8 Engine) 0 280 orRecommended Fuel (6.2LV8 Engine) 0 281.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18 °C (0 °F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to be

refilled more often. See Filling theTank (Pickup Model) 0 283 orFilling the Tank (Chassis CabModel) 0 285.

The only GM approved aftermarketadditive is ACDelco Fuel SystemTreatment Plus-FlexFuel. Follow theinstructions on the bottle for properuse. This product is available atyour GM dealer.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Use only additivesapproved by GM for E85 orFlexFuel vehicles. Damagecaused by unapproved additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

To help keep the engine runningefficiently, fill the tank with gasoline,up to E15, after filling the tank withE85 one or two times.

Filling the Tank (PickupModel)If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates which side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge0 131.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

Follow these guidelines to helpavoid injuries to you and others:

. Read and follow all theinstructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronicdevices while refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Before touching the fillnozzle, touch a metallicobject to discharge staticelectricity from your body.

. Fuel can spray out if the fillnozzle is inserted tooquickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the fill nozzleslowly and wait for any hissnoise to stop beforebeginning to flow fuel.



The capless refueling system doesnot have a fuel cap. Fully insert andlatch the fill nozzle, begin fueling.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Under certain conditions,fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Waitfive seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the fillnozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 429. Push the fueldoor closed.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the fillnozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Filling the Tank with a PortableFuel Container

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable fuelcontainer:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel from aportable fuel container withoutusing the funnel adapter maycause fuel spillage and damagethe capless fuel system. Thiscould cause a fire. You or otherscould be badly burned and thevehicle could be damaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return it to thestorage location.



Filling the Tank (ChassisCab Model)If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates which side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on. See Fuel Gauge0 131.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

Follow these guidelines to helpavoid injuries to you and others:

. Read and follow all theinstructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.


(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronicdevices while refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Before touching the fillnozzle, touch a metallicobject to discharge staticelectricity from your body.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.

Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. Fully insert and latch thefill nozzle, begin fueling. If thevehicle is a dual fuel tank chassiscab model, and it runs out of fuel,refuel the front fuel tank first toensure a quick restart.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Under certain conditions,fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Waitfive seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the fillnozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 429. Reinstall thecap by turning it clockwise until itclicks.



{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the fillnozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, getthe right type of cap from yourdealer. The wrong type of fuel capmay not fit properly, may turn onthe malfunction indicator lamp,and could damage the fuelsystem and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 137.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. To help avoidinjury to you and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, in a pickupbed, or on any surface otherthan the ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside ofthe fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle.Maintain contact until fillingis complete.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)


. Do not use electronicdevices while pumping fuel.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle to tow a trailer. Read theentire section before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 424. To towthe vehicle behind another vehiclesuch as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 424.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towinga trailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is notdriven properly. For example,if the trailer is too heavy or the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

trailer brakes are inadequate forthe load, the vehicle may not stopas expected. You and otherscould be seriously injured. Thevehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these are

important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws thatapply to trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the useof extended side view mirrors.Even if not required, you shouldinstall extended side viewmirrors if your visibility is limitedor restricted while towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. It is recommended to performthe first oil change before heavytowing.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)of trailer towing, do not driveover 80 km/h (50 mph) and donot make starts at full throttle.


288 Driving and Operating. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).

Tow/Haul Mode is recommendedfor heavier trailers. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 227. If thetransmission downshifts toooften, a lower gear may beselected using Manual Mode.See Manual Mode 0 224.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned off when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should beturned to alert or off when towing atrailer:

. Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones thatextend out from the back of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed.

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or deathfrom carbon monoxide (CO),when towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 220.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not asresponsive as the vehicle itself. Getused to the handling and braking ofthe combination by driving on alevel road surface before driving onpublic roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, andthe brakes must all be rated to carrythe intended cargo. Inadequatetrailer equipment can cause thecombination to operate in an



unexpected or unsafe manner.Before driving, inspect all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 296. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and thenmanually apply the trailer brakecontroller to check that the trailerbrakes work. During the trip,occasionally check that the cargoand trailer are secure and that thelamps and any trailer brakes areworking.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement causedby the trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This canhelp to avoid heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination of the vehicle andtrailer will not accelerate as quicklyand is much longer than the vehiclealone. It is necessary to go muchfarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane. Passon level roadways. Avoid passingon hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move that hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so the trailer will not go oversoft shoulders, over curbs, or strikeroad signs, trees, or other objects.Always signal turns well in advance.Do not steer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downhill grade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes may overheat and result inreduced braking efficiency.



The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle could show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run, preferably onlevel ground, with the transmissionin P (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 351.

Viewing Systems

If equipped, the viewing systems onthe vehicle can improve visibilitywhile hitching, backing, and drivingwith a trailer. See Driver AssistanceSystems 0 255.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle andtrailer on a level surface whenpossible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. Gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks toabsorb the load of the trailer.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Launching and Retrievinga Boat

Backing the Trailer into the Water

{ Warning

. Have all passengers get outof the vehicle beforebacking onto the sloped partof the ramp. Lower thedriver and passenger sidewindows before backingonto the ramp. This will

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

provide a means of escapein the unlikely event thevehicle slides into the water.

. If the boat launch surface isslippery, have the driverremain in the vehicle withthe brake pedal appliedwhile the boat is beinglaunched. The boat launchcan be especially slippery atlow tide when part of theramp was previouslysubmerged at high tide. Donot back onto the ramp tolaunch the boat if you arenot sure the vehicle canmaintain traction.

. Do not move the vehicle ifsomeone is in the path ofthe trailer. Some parts of thetrailer might be underwaterand not visible to peoplewho are assisting inlaunching the boat.

Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into thewater to prevent damage to theelectrical circuits on the trailer.Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from thewater. If the trailer has electricbrakes that can function when thetrailer is submerged, it might help toleave the electrical trailer connectorattached to maintain trailer brakefunctionality while on the boat ramp.

To back the trailer into the water:

1. If equipped, place the vehiclein four-wheel-drive high.

2. Slowly back down the boatramp until the boat is floating,but no further than necessary.

3. Press and hold the brakepedal, but do not shift intoP (Park) yet.

4. Have someone place chocksunder the front wheels of thevehicle.

5. Gradually release the brakepedal to allow the chocks toabsorb the load of the trailer.

6. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).


Pulling the Trailer from the Water

To pull the trailer out of the water:

1. Press and hold the brakepedal.

2. Start the engine and shiftinto gear.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Let up on the brake pedal.

5. Drive slowly until the tires areclear of the chocks.

6. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

7. Slowly pull the trailer from thewater.

8. Once the vehicle and trailerhave been driven from thesloped part of the boat ramp,the vehicle can be shifted fromfour-wheel-drive high. Shift into



the drive mode that isappropriate for the roadconditions.

Caution

If the vehicle tires begin to spinand the vehicle begins to slidetoward the water, remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedaland apply the brake pedal. Seekhelp to have the vehicle towed upthe ramp.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441. It isespecially important to check theengine oil, axle lubricant, belts,cooling system, and brake systembefore and during each trip.

Check periodically to see that allnuts and bolts on the trailer hitchare tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 351.

Trailer TowingIf equipped with a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealerfor important information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow frequently the vehicle is used totow a trailer.

Trailer Weight Ratings

When towing a trailer, the combinedweight of the vehicle, vehiclecontents, trailer, and trailer contents



must be below all of the maximumweight ratings for the vehicle,including:

. GCWR: Gross Combined WeightRating

. GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating

. Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

. GAWR-RR: Gross Axle WeightRating-Rear

. Maximum Trailer Tongue WeightRating

See “Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment” under TowingEquipment 0 296 to determine ifequalizer bars are required to obtainthe maximum trailer weight rating.

See “Trailer Brakes” under TowingEquipment 0 296 to determine ifbrakes are required based on yourtrailer's weight.

The only way to be sure the weightis not exceeding any of theseratings is to weigh the tow vehicleand trailer combination, fully loadedfor the trip, getting individualweights for each of these items.

A trailering information label on theB-pillar shows tow rating informationfor the vehicle.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. Thevehicle may be damaged, and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR)

GCWR is the total allowable weightof the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any fuel,passengers, cargo, equipment, andaccessories. Do not exceed theGCWR for your vehicle. The GCWRfor the vehicle is on the TraileringInformation Label.

To check that the weight of thevehicle and trailer are within theGCWR for the vehicle, follow thesesteps:

1. Start with the "curb weight"from the Trailering InformationLabel.

2. Add the weight of the trailerloaded with cargo and readyfor the trip.

3. Add the weight of allpassengers.

4. Add the weight of all cargo inthe vehicle.

5. Add the weight of hitchhardware such as a draw bar,ball, load equalizer bars,or sway bars.

6. Add the weight of anyaccessories or aftermarketequipment added to thevehicle.

The resulting weight cannot exceedthe GCWR value on the TraileringInformation Label.



The gross combined weight canalso be confirmed by weighing thetruck and trailer on a public scale.The truck and trailer should beloaded for the trip with passengersand cargo.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 200. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached,the trailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.

Maximum Trailer Weight

The maximum trailer weight rating iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas a driver, a front seat passenger,and all required traileringequipment. This value representsthe heaviest trailer the vehicle cantow, but it may be necessary toreduce the trailer weight to staywithin the GCWR, GVWR, maximumtrailer tongue load, or GAWR-RR forthe vehicle.

Use the Tow Rating Guide(my.gmc.com/learn) to determinehow much the trailer can weigh,based on the vehicle model andoptions.

Weights listed apply forconventional trailers andgooseneck/fifth-wheel trailers unlessotherwise noted.

A step bumper trailer hitch can onlysupport a total trailer weight up to2 271 kg (5,000 lb). If a trailer hitchball is added to the step bumper,check the hitch ball rating to be sureit is higher than the total trailerweight.

Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating

The Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating is the allowabletrailer tongue weight that the vehiclecan support using a conventionaltrailer hitch. It may be necessary toreduce the overall trailer weight tostay within the maximum trailertongue weight rating while stillmaintaining the correct trailer loadbalance. A fifth-wheel or gooseneckhitch may support a higher tongueweight.



The Maximum Trailer TongueWeight Rating for a conventionaltrailer hitch or a fifth wheel/gooseneck hitch is shown on theTrailering Information Label.

Do not exceed a maximum trailertongue weight of 567 kg (1,250 lb)for a conventional trailer hitch.

The trailer tongue weight contributesto the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).GVW includes the curb weight ofyour vehicle, any passengers,cargo, equipment and the trailertongue weight. Vehicle options,passengers, cargo, and equipmentreduce the maximum allowabletongue weight the vehicle can carry,which also reduces the maximumallowable trailer weight.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balancemust be maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% and fifth-wheel orgooseneck tongue weight should be15–25% of the total loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailertypes, such as boat trailers, falloutside of this range. Always referto the trailer owner’s manual for therecommended trailer tongue weightfor each trailer. Never exceed themaximum loads for the vehicle,hitch, and trailer.

The trailer load balance percentageis calculated as: weight (1) dividedby weight (2) times 100.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue and calculate the trailer loadbalance percentage to see if theweights and distribution areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to transfer some of thecargo into your vehicle. If the trailertongue weight is too high or too low,it may be possible to rearrangesome of the cargo inside of thetrailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more than



half of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR-RR)

The GAWR-RR is the total weightthat can be supported by the rearaxle of the vehicle. Do not exceedthe GAWR-RR for the vehicle, withthe tow vehicle and trailer fullyloaded for the trip including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight-distributing hitch, do notexceed the GAWR-RR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

The GAWR-RR for the vehicle is onthe Trailering Information Label.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Conventional Hitch

A conventional hitch is bolted to theframe or cross member of the towvehicle, and is generally rated Class2, 3, or 4.

Gooseneck Hitch

A gooseneck hitch is designed to becoupled to a special hitch leveraginga hitch ball, and is mounted over therear axle in the truck bed.

Fifth-Wheel Hitch

A fifth-wheel hitch is mounted overthe rear axle in the truck bed, andleverages a hinged plate — thesame type of hitch leveraged bysemi trucks. Generally, fifth-wheelhitches accommodate large trailerswith as many as one, two, or threeaxles.

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by,and rough roads can affect thetrailer and the hitch.

Proper hitch equipment for yourvehicle helps maintain control of thevehicle-trailer combination. Manytrailers can be towed using aweight-carrying hitch which has acoupler latched to the hitch ball, or atow eye latched to a pintle hook.Other trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that uses



spring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight between your vehicleand trailer axles. Fifth-wheel andgooseneck hitches may also beused. See “Maximum Trailer TongueWeight” under Trailer Towing 0 292for weight limits with various hitchtypes.

Avoid sharp turns when using astep-bumper hitch to preventdamage. Make wider turns toprevent contact between your trailerand your bumper.

Consider using mechanical swaycontrols with any trailer. Ask atrailering professional about swaycontrols or refer to the trailermanufacturer's recommendationsand instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment

A weight-distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight-distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight-Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Not Required 50%

1500 Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Required 50%

2500/3500 Up to 9 080 kg (20,000 lb) Not Required 25%

1. Front of Vehicle2. H1/H2 Body to Ground

Distance

Towing with Model 1500 Trucks

1. Position the truck so that thetrailer is ready to connect.Keep the trailer detached.

2. Measure the height of the topof the front wheel opening atthe fender to the ground (H1).

3. Attach the vehicle to the trailer.Do not attach weightdistribution bars at this time.

4. Measure the height of the topof the front wheel opening onthe fender to the ground (H2).

5. Install and adjust the tension inthe weight-distributing bars perthe manufacturers’recommendations so that theheight of the front fender isapproximately H2−[(H2−H1)/2](halfway between the twomeasured ride heights).

6. Visually inspect the trailer andweight-distributing hitch toensure that the manufacturers’recommendations havebeen met.



Measurement Height Example 1500 (mm)

H1 1 000

H2 1 050

H2−H1 50

(H2−H1)/2 25

H2−[(H2−H1)/2] 1 025

Towing with Model 2500/3500Trucks

1. Position the truck so that thetrailer is ready to connect.Keep the trailer detached.

2. Measure the height of the topof the front wheel opening atthe fender to the ground (H1).

3. Attach the vehicle to the trailer.Do not attach weightdistribution bars at this time.

4. Measure the height of the topof the front wheel opening onthe fender to the ground (H2).

5. Install and adjust the tension inthe weight-distributing bars perthe manufacturers’recommendations so that theheight of the front fender isapproximately H2−[(H2−H1)/4](1/4 the difference between thetwo measured ride heights,below the secondary rideheight {H2}).

6. Visually inspect the trailer andweight-distributing hitch toensure that the manufacturers’recommendations havebeen met.



Measurement Height Example 2500/3500 (mm)

H1 1 040

H2 1 080

H2−H1 40

(H2−H1)/4 10

H2−[(H2−H1)/4] 1 070

Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on thevehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 379 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Fifth-Wheel and GooseneckTrailering

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailerscan be used with many pickupmodels. These trailers place alarger percentage of the weight(kingpin weight) on the tow vehiclethan conventional trailers. Make

sure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpinweight should be 15–25% of thetrailer weight up to the maximumamount specified in the traileringchart for the vehicle. See “TrailerWeight" under Trailer Towing 0 292.

The hitch should be in the pickupbed so that its centerline is over orslightly in front of the rear axle. Takecare that it is not so far forward thatit will contact the back of the cab insharp turns. This is especiallyimportant for short box pickups.Trailer pin box extensions andsliding fifth-wheel hitch assembliesmay be used. There should be atleast 15 cm (6 in) of clearance

between the top of the pickup boxand the bottom of the trailer shelfthat extends over the box.

Make sure the hitch is attached tothe tow vehicle frame rails. Do notuse the pickup box for support.

Safety Chains

Always attach safety chainsbetween the vehicle and the trailer.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer.

If the trailer being towed weighs upto 2 271 kg (5,000 lb) with afactory-installed step bumper, safetychains may be attached to the



attaching points on the bumper;otherwise, safety chains should beattached to holes on the trailer hitch.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the roadif it becomes separated from thehitch. Always leave enough slack inthe safety chains to allow thecombination to turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Loaded trailers over 900 kg(2,000 lb) must be equipped withbrake systems and with brakes foreach axle. Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.

State or local regulations mayrequire trailers to have their ownbraking system if the loaded weightof the trailer exceeds certainminimums that can vary from stateto state. Read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, and

maintained properly. Never attemptto tap into your vehicle's hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both thevehicle antilock brakes and thetrailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Auxiliary Battery

If equipped, the vehicle's auxiliarybattery can be used to supplyelectrical power to additionalequipment that may be added, suchas a slide-in camper.

Locate the auxiliary batteryconnector under the hood on thedriver side of the vehicle, next to theengine compartment fuse block.Follow the proper installationinstructions included with anyelectrical equipment that is installed.

Caution

To prevent draining the auxiliarybattery, always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not use any equipment that

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may exceed themaximum amperage rating of30 amps.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

If the vehicle is not equipped with atrailer connector on the rear bumper,a 7-wire trailering harness is tied tothe vehicles frame. The harnessrequires the installation of a trailerconnector, which is availablethrough your dealer.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

Stop/TurnSignal Left

Yellow/Blue

Stop/TurnSignal Right

Green/Violet



Tail/ParkingLamps

Gray/Brown

Reverse Lamps White/Green

Battery Feed Red/Green

Ground White

Electric TrailerBrake

Blue

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

If equipped, the trailer wiringharness, with a 7-pin connector anda 4-pin connector, is mounted onthe vehicle's rear bumper.

The trailer connectors contain thefollowing circuits.

1. Ground

2. Tail Lamps

3. Left Turn/Brake

4. Right Turn/Brake

1. Left Turn/Brake

2. Tail Lamps

3. Reverse Lamps

4. Battery Feed

5. Right Turn/Brake

6. Electric Brakes

7. Ground

If equipped, trailering cameraconnectors are available in thebumper trailer receptacle in place ofthe four pin connector. The insidetrailer auxiliary camera should beinstalled on the top left hand



side (A) and the rear trailer auxiliarycamera (B) should be installed onthe top right hand side.

If equipped with the fifth wheel/gooseneck trailer package, theharness connector is mounted onthe inside of the pickup bed behindthe rear wheel.

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer WiringPackage

For vehicles without the fifth wheel/gooseneck trailer package, theseven-wire camper harness is underthe rear bumper, attached to theframe near the rear crossmember.A connector must be added to thewiring harness that connects to thecamper.

The harness contains the followingcamper/trailer circuits:

Stop/TurnSignal Left

Yellow/Blue

Stop/TurnSignal Right

Green/Violet

Tail/ParkingLamps

Gray/Brown

Reverse Lamps White/Green

Battery Feed Red/Green

Ground White

Electric TrailerBrake

Blue

If equipped with the heavy-dutytrailering option, see “Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness Package”earlier in this section. When thecamper-wiring harness is orderedwithout the heavy-duty traileringpackage, a seven-wire harness witha seven-pin connector is at the rearof the vehicle and is tied to thevehicle's frame.

Trailer Lamps

Always check that all trailer lampsare working at the beginning of eachtrip, and periodically on longer trips.

If equipped, the Trailering App willmonitor the RH turn/brake lampcircuit, LH turn/brake lamp circuit,running lamp circuit, and reverse



lamp circuits on the trailer. DICmessages and Trailering App alertsmay be displayed if lighting circuitissues are detected on the trailer.

Pressing START LIGHT TEST in theTrailering App automaticallyactivates the trailer lamps. TheTrailering App is not a substitute formanually inspecting your trailerlamps. See Trailering App 0 310.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals will illuminate to indicatethe vehicle is turning, changinglanes, or stopping. When towing atrailer, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will illuminate even if thetrailer is not properly connected orthe bulbs are burned out.

Tow/Haul Mode

For instructions on how to enterTow/Haul Mode, see Driver ModeControl 0 238.

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 227.

Tow/Haul Mode is designed to bemost effective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75% of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Trailer Weight” under TrailerTowing 0 292.

Tow/Haul Mode is most useful whentowing a heavy trailer or carrying alarge or heavy load:

. Through rolling terrain.

. In stop-and-go traffic.

. In busy parking lots.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or nottowing will not cause damage;however, it is not recommended andmay result in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristics,heavy or light steering efforts, andreduced fuel economy.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric over hydraulic trailer

brake systems. These instructionsapply to both types of electric trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anITBC system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is proportional tothe amount of vehicle braking. Thisavailable power output to the trailerbrakes can be adjusted to a widerange of trailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santilock brake or StabiliTrak/ESCsystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimize



trailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer hasStabiliTrak/ESC.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak/ESC systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not function fully or atall. Make sure all of these systemsare fully operational to allow theITBC system to function properly.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in on.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking, including increasedstopping distance or trailerinstability which could result inserious injury, death, or propertydamage. Only use the ITBC

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system with electric or electricover hydraulic trailer brakesystems.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Symbol3. Trailer Gain Adjustment

Buttons

The trailer symbol on the controlpanel will light amber when a trailerwith electric brakes is connected.

The ITBC control panel is on thecenter stack. See Instrument PanelOverview 0 5. The control panelallows adjustment to the amount ofoutput, referred to as Trailer Gain,available to the trailer brakes andallows manual application of thetrailer brakes. Use the ITBC controlpanel and the DIC trailer brakedisplay page to adjust and displaypower output to the trailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC display page indicates:

. Trailer Gain setting

. Output to the trailer brakes

. Trailer connection

. System operational status

To display:

. Scroll through the DIC menupages

. Press a Trailer Gain (+) or (−)button


306 Driving and Operating. Activate the Manual Trailer

Brake Apply Lever

TRAILER GAIN: Press a TrailerGain button to recall the currentTrailer Gain setting. Each press andrelease of the gain buttons will thenchange the Trailer Gain setting.Press the Trailer Gain (+) or (-) toadjust. Press and hold tocontinuously adjust the Trailer Gain.To turn the output to the trailer off,adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0.This setting can be adjusted from0.0 to 10.0 with a trailer connectedor disconnected.

TRAILER OUTPUT: This displaysanytime a trailer with electric brakesis connected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:

. No trailer is connected.

. A trailer without electric brakesis connected. No DIC messagedisplays.

. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected.A CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage displays on the DIC.

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes.A CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage displays on the DIC.

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault. A SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage displays in the DIC.

Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

Slide this lever right to apply thetrailer’s electric brakes independentof the vehicle’s brakes. Use thislever to adjust the Trailer Gain toachieve proper power output to thetrailer brakes. Under certaincircumstances, this lever can alsobe used to apply additional trailerbraking. The trailer and vehiclebrake lamps will come on when

either the vehicle brakes or trailerbrakes are applied and properlyconnected.

Trailer Gain AdjustmentProcedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and itmust be readjusted anytime vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.

To adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface representative of the



towing condition and free oftraffic at about 32–40 km/h(20–25 mph) and fully applythe Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever.

Adjusting Trailer Gain atspeeds lower than 32–40 km/h(20–25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, usingthe Trailer Gain (+) or (−)adjustment buttons, to justbelow the point of trailer wheellock-up, indicated by trailerwheel squeal or tire smokewhen a trailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. Adjust the Trailer Gainto the highest allowable settingfor the towing condition.

3. Readjust Trailer Gain anytimevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheellock-up is noticed at any timewhile towing.

Other ITBC-Related DICMessages

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. This

message will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault inthe trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine whether the electricalfault is on the vehicle side or trailerside of the trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILERWIRING message reappears,the electrical fault is on thevehicle side.



If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only reappears whenconnecting the trailer wiring harnessto the vehicle, the electrical fault ison the trailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this messagecontinues over multiple ignitioncycles, have the vehicle serviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.

Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC) have aTrailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.Trailer sway is unintendedside-to-side motion of a trailer whiletowing. If the vehicle is towing atrailer and the TSC detects thatsway is increasing, the vehiclebrakes are selectively applied ateach wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway. If equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, and thetrailer has an electric brake system,StabiliTrak/ESC may also apply thetrailer brakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak/ESC warning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Reduce vehiclespeed by gradually removing yourfoot from the accelerator. If trailersway continues, StabiliTrak/ESCcan reduce engine torque to helpslow the vehicle. TSC will notfunction if StabiliTrak/ESC is turnedoff. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 235.

{ Warning

Trailer sway can result in a crashand in serious injury or death,even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

If the trailer begins to sway,reduce vehicle speed bygradually removing your foot fromthe accelerator. Then pull over tocheck the trailer and vehicle tohelp correct possible causes,including an improperly oroverloaded trailer, unrestrainedcargo, improper trailer hitchconfiguration, or improperlyinflated or incorrect vehicle ortrailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 296 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Aftermarket Electronic TrailerSway Control Devices

Some trailers may come equippedwith an electronic device designedto reduce or control trailer sway.Aftermarket equipmentmanufacturers also offer similardevices that connect to the wiringbetween the trailer and the vehicle.These devices may interfere with

the vehicle’s trailer brake or othersystems, including integratedanti-sway systems, if equipped.Messages related to trailerconnections or trailer brakes couldappear on the DIC. The effects ofthese aftermarket devices may haveon vehicle handling or trailer brakeperformance is not known.

{ Warning

Use of aftermarket electronictrailer sway control devices couldresult in reduced trailer brakeperformance, loss of trailerbrakes, or other malfunctions, andresult in a crash. You or otherscould be seriously injured orkilled. Before using one of thesedevices:

. Ask the device or trailermanufacturer if the devicehas been thoroughly testedfor compatibility with themake, model, and year of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

your vehicle and anyoptional equipment installedon your vehicle.

. Before driving, check thetrailer brakes are workingproperly, if equipped. Drivethe vehicle with the trailerattached on a level roadsurface that is free of trafficat about 32-40 km/h(20-25 mph) and fully applythe manual trailer brakeapply lever. Also, check thetrailer brake lamps andother lamps are functioningcorrectly.

. If the trailer brakes are notoperating properly at anytime, or if a DIC messageindicates problems with thetrailer connections or trailerbrakes, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side ofthe road when trafficconditions allow.



Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires aredesigned with stiff sidewalls to helpprevent sway and to support heavyloads. These features can make itdifficult to determine if the trailer tirepressures are low only based on avisual inspection.

Always check all trailer tirepressures before each trip when thetires are cool. Low trailer tirepressure is a leading cause of trailertire blow-outs.

If the vehicle is equipped with atrailer tire pressure monitoringsystem, see the trailer tire pressuremonitoring system description andthe trailering app.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time.The trailer tire sidewall will show theweek and year the tire wasmanufactured. Many trailer tiremanufacturers recommendreplacing tires more than sixyears old.

Overloading is another leadingcause of trailer tire blow-outs. Neverload your trailer with more weightthan the tires are designed tosupport. The load rating is locatedon the trailer tire sidewall.

Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the defaulttrailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h(65 mph).

Trailering App

Trailer Light App

If equipped, the Trailer Lights App ison the Home Page of theinfotainment display.

Touch Start to cycle the trailer lampson and off to determine if they areworking. The test follows thissequence:

1. The running lights turn on firstand remain on throughout thesequence.

2. The brake lights turn on forabout two seconds.

3. The left turn signal light flashesthree times.

4. The right turn signal lightflashes three times.

5. The reverse lights turn on forabout two seconds.

6. Steps 2–5 repeat forapproximately one minute and45 seconds, or until the testdeactivates.

Touch Stop to stop the test. The testwill automatically end afterone minute and 45 seconds.

The sequence also deactivateswhen any of the following occur:


. The transmission is shifted outof P (Park).

. The brake pedal is pressed.

. The turn signal is activated.


Driving and Operating 311. The hazard warning lights are

activated.

Trailering App

If equipped, the Trailering App is onthe Home Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

If equipped this feature allowsprofiles for connected trailers to becreated to view status, to store andtrack trailer usage information, andto set up towing assistancefeatures.

The Trailering App Preview willappear when the Trailering App isopened for the first time from theHome Page. Touch GET STARTEDin the Trailering App to go intothe app.

When a trailer is electricallyconnected, there will be an option tocreate a profile, use a guest profile,or cancel. After Cancel is selected athird time, Don’t Remind Me willdisplay and touching that will turn offthe trailer detection pop-up. To turnthe Trailer Detection Alert on, selectON in the Settings tab.

When a trailer is electricallyconnected and after a Trailer Profilehas been created, the trailerdetection pop-up will appear with alist of all of the custom TrailerProfiles made on the vehicle. Toload an existing Trailer Profile,select one of the Trailer Profileslisted, or load the Guest TrailerProfile by selecting GUESTTRAILER. Touching Cancel,Accessory/No trailer, or shifting thevehicle from P (Park), will selectAccessory/No trailer as the activeTrailer Profile and will dismiss thepop- up.

Create a Trailer Profile

1. Touch Create Profile on thepop-up or touch + Add Trailerin the Trailering App.

2. Create a name for the trailer.

3. Select the hitch type.A checklist profile will becreated based on the typeselected.

4. Select the trailer type.

A pop-up will indicate the setup iscomplete. Touch DONE to completethe process or touch TRAILERFEATURE SETUP to set up theTow/Haul Mode reminder, TrailerTire Pressure Monitoring System,if equipped, maintenance reminders,or towing assistance, if equipped.

Import a Trailer Profile

A trailer profile saved to an OnStaraccount can be imported to thevehicle.

1. Touch Import Profile on thepop-up.

2. Select a trailer profile fromthe list.

3. Touch IMPORT.

A pop-up will indicate the importwas successful. Touch OK to returnto the trailer list and select the trailerprofile. The Tow/Haul Modereminder, Brake Gain Setting andTrailer Tire Pressure sensorlearning, if equipped, do not import.



Trailer Feature Setup

Tow/Haul Mode Reminder

To turn the Tow/Haul ModeReminder setting on, touch Yes. Toturn it off, touch No.

Trailer Tire Pressure Setup

If the Trailer Tire PressureMonitoring System (TTPMS) isdetected, touch the Tire PressureMonitoring icon to set up tirepressure monitoring.Touch Yes toset up the sensors or touch No toreturn to the previous screen.

A trailer must be electricallyconnected to the vehicle beforestarting the sensor-to-vehicle learnprocess.

After selecting Start from the LearnSensors screen, use the ToolMethod or the Manual Method(described below) to learn each tiresensor, during which the current tirenumber will be highlighted.

Each sensor has a minimum oftwo minutes to learn, shown by atimer. After a sensor is learned, acheckmark appears next to the tire,

the vehicle horn will sound, thevehicle’s brake lamps will flash, andall working trailer lamps will flash.It then moves to the next sensor.

To cancel the process touch Stop.

The recommended tire pressuremust be entered for the trailer tires.This allows the vehicle to alert whenthe tire pressure is high or low.

TTPMS must learn the location ofthe installed tire sensors to showcorrect air pressure andtemperature for each tire. To set up,use one of the following options orsee a tire or trailer dealer forservice. The learning process mustbe repeated when the trailer tiresare rotated or replaced. See “Editinga Trailer Profile” later in this sectionfor tire pressure sensor relearninformation.

Tool Method: A TTPMS activationtool can be purchased separately tolearn the sensor locations.

Manual Method: Without the tool,the air pressure can be increased ordecreased in each tire for10 seconds. Do not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure foundon the tire sidewalls. Make sure tore-adjust tire pressure to therecommended level when theprocess is complete.

Sensor Learning Steps

To complete the sensor-to-vehiclelearn process:

1. Touch Start on the LearnSensors screen. The hornchirps twice and the LearningActive screen appears on theinfotainment display.

2. Start with the driver side fronttrailer tire.

3. Activate the tool near the valvestem or adjust the air pressureof this tire until the horn chirpsand all working vehicle andtrailer lights flash.

The process stops withoutsaving the sensor locations ifthis step takes more thantwo minutes.



4. Move to the next tire andrepeat Step 3 for each sensor.The horn chirps twice when allsensors are completed.

5. Return to the vehicle tocomplete the setup.

Maintenance Reminders

To set up maintenance reminders,touch the Trailer Maintenance icon.Select Yes to set up themaintenance reminders for theTrailer Profile. Follow the on-screenprompts. The maximum number ofreminders is 50. Select No to returnto the previous screen.

Towing Assistance

If the Transparent Trailer feature isavailable, touch the TowingAssistance icon to set uptransparent trailer.

Touch Yes to begin set up or touchNo to return to the previous screen.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

A rear trailer camera must bemounted on the trailer andelectrically connected to the vehicle

before transparent trailer featurecan be used. See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backing0 257.

Trailer dimensions must be in rangeand transparent trailer must becalibrated prior to use.

Transparent Trailer Setup

To complete setup for transparenttrailer:

1. Select the number of axles onthe trailer.

2. Enter trailer dimensions

. Trailer Length: 300 cm(118.1 in) – 970 cm(381.8 in). Measure fromcenter of coupler to furthestrear point on the trailer.

. Trailer Width: 120 cm(47.2 in) – 260 cm(102.3 in). Measure fromleft edge to right edge.

. Trailer Height: 1 cm(0.39 in) – 450 cm(177.1 in). Measure fromground to tallest point.

. Hitching Point Length:180 cm (70.8 in) – 970 cm(381.8 in). Measure fromcenter of coupler to middleof tires.

. Trailer Tongue Length:50 cm (119.6 in) – 220 cm(86.6 in). Measure fromcenter of coupler to trailerfront wall.

. Vehicle Hitch Height: 10 cm(3.9 in) – 100 cm (39.3 in).Measure from ground to topof coupler.

. Vehicle Hitch Length: 10 cm(3.9 in) – 100 cm (39.3 in).Measure from hitch receiverto center of ball.

3. If trailer dimensions are out ofrange, this feature will beunavailable. Select OK toreturn.

4. Ensure rear trailer camera isconnected.

5. Follow instructions to driveforward to complete calibration.



6. Return to the vehicle tocomplete the setup.

Status View

The Status view shows:

. Truck

. Connections

. Trailer

. Maintenance

. Cameras

Upon entry, the most recent itemswill be shown. Select MORE to viewall options.

Truck

1. Transmission FluidTemperature

2. Average Fuel Economy withTrailer Profile

Average Fuel Economy

Touch to view the average fueleconomy of the vehicle while theTrailer Profile is active.

Transmission Temperature

View the temperature of thetransmission fluid by looking at thegraphic. The graphic will indicate adangerous level if the temperatureis at 130 °C–150 °C (270 °F–300 °F).

Connections

1. Light Test Start Button2. Trailer Electrical Diagnostics



Connections OK

If all of the trailer connections aredetected (Running Lights, Left TurnSignal Light, Right Turn SignalLight, Reverse Lights, and ElectricBrakes, if equipped), the view willdisplay OK.

Connection Problem

If any of the trailer connections arenot detected, a message about theconnection issue will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC). Theinfotainment display will also showthe connection issue in theConnection Status view.

Diagnose View

Touch Diagnose to see moreinformation about the connectionproblem.

This view will display the names ofthe trailer connector pins, a graphicof the trailer connector, and agraphic of the back of the trailer.

Any connector pin that failed will beamber color, and the location of thecorresponding connection will behighlighted on the graphic of theback of the trailer.

The Running Lights connection maynot detect partial outages. Activatethe light test to check all trailerlamps. See “Light Test” following.

If the trailer is not equipped withreverse lights or electric brakes andyou are receiving failure messagesin the DIC or on this view, turn offthe Reverse Lights Alert or theElectric Brakes Alert setting in thetrailer’s profile page.

Light Test

Touch Start Light Test to cycle thetrailer lights on and off to determineif they are working. The test followsthis sequence:

1. The running lights turn on firstand remain on throughout thesequence.

2. The brake lights turn on forabout two seconds.

3. The left turn signal light flashesthree times.

4. The right turn signal lightflashes three times.

5. The reverse lights turn on forabout two seconds.

6. Steps 2–5 repeat forapproximately one minute and45 seconds, or until the testdeactivates.

Touch Stop to stop the test. The testwill automatically end afterone minute and 45 seconds.

The sequence also deactivateswhen any of the following occur:


. The transmission is shifted outof P (Park).

. The brake pedal is pressed.

. The turn signal is activated.

. The hazard warning lights areactivated.



Trailer

1. Trailer Tire Pressure/Temperature

2. Mileage of Trailer

Mileage

The mileage accumulated while thisTrailer Profile is active will display.Touch mileage to edit.

Tire Pressure and Temperature

If the TTPMS sensor-to-vehiclelearn process was completed, thestatus view will display the currenttire pressure and temperature of thetrailer tires related to the active

Trailer Profile. If a tire’s pressure islow or high, the color of thepressure value will be amber. If asensor malfunctions, the values aredashed lines. If the screen displays“Service Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem”, the vehicle needs to betaken to a dealer for service.

Maintenance

1. List of MaintenanceReminders

2. Add a New MaintenanceReminder

The Maintenance Status viewdisplays reminders. Touch areminder to edit.

Touch + New MaintenanceReminder to go to the Select NewReminder view.

The progress bar turns yellow whenthe maintenance item reaches 90%complete.

The progress bar turns red whenthe maintenance item reaches100% complete.

Maintenance Notifications

. Touch Service Complete to resetthe maintenance reminder.

. Touch Remind Me Later to delaythe reminder.

. Touch X next to Upcoming Alerts(90%) to dismiss the alert. It willnot appear again.

. Touch X next to MaintenanceDue (100%) to delay the alert tothe next ignition cycle.

Always follow all of the maintenanceinstructions that came with yourtrailer.



Cameras

1. Rear Trailer Not Connected/Preview, if equipped

2. Interior Trailer NotConnected/Preview,if equipped

3. Transparent Trailer Not SetUp/Preview, if equipped

The Cameras Status view displaysstatus of trailer cameras.

Touch a connected camera topreview the camera image.

Touch the Transparent Trailer optionto enter Transparent Trailer Setup ifsetup is not complete.

Guest Trailer Status View

Touch the Guest Trailer Profile forthe status views.

The Guest Trailer Profile Statusview shows:

. Truck

. Trailer

. Connections

. Cameras, if equipped

The Trailer Status view displaysmileage information. Touch to edit,and follow the on-screen prompts.Mileage and fuel economy will resetafter the trailer disconnects. TheCameras Status view displaysstatus of trailer cameras. Touch aconnected camera to preview thecamera image.

Checklist View

This view shows the recommendedsteps to take before towing a trailer.

Touch the box next to each item ifthat step has been completed.

Touchp to access a detailedview of each step. Within eachdetailed view, touch Next andPrevious to navigate between steps.

Touch Clear All to clear thecompleted statuses from all items inthe current checklist.

The checklist is unique to the TrailerProfile based on hitch type; forexample, the steps involve differentdetails between conventional,gooseneck, and fifth-wheel hitchtypes.

Custom Checklist Items

For each of the Trailer Profilechecklists, there is an option tocreate custom items to view in thechecklist. The custom item willappear at the bottom of thechecklist.

Guest Trailer and No TrailerConnected

If Guest Trailer Profile is active or ifno trailer is connected, the checklistwill show all of the checklists



associated with Custom TrailerProfiles in addition to defaultchecklists.

Trailers View

Touch the Trailers tab to view,activate, create, edit, or deleteTrailer Profiles.

If a trailer is connected, touch theTrailer Profile name to activate aTrailer Profile.

There can be up to five CustomTrailer Profiles on the vehicle.

The Custom Trailer Profiles andGuest Trailer are in order of themost frequently used.

All personalization features arebased on the settings for eachdriver in vehicle personalization.The list of Trailer Profiles is basedon vehicle personalization settings.

Guest Trailer

If the Guest Trailer Profile is theactive Trailer Profile, trailerdetection, connections status, theft,and the Tow/Haul reminder alertscan be sent. The system will not

track total mileage or fuel economy,but the system will track trip mileageand fuel economy if the GuestTrailer Profile is active. The TrailerTire Pressure Monitoring System ormaintenance reminders cannot beset up for a Guest Trailer Profile.The Guest Trailer Profile cannot beedited.

Touchp to learn more about theGuest Trailer option.

No Trailer Connected

When there is no trailer connected,Trailer Profiles cannot be activatedbut most options can be edited.

Trailer Brake Gain Memory

The system can memorize the brakegain setting of a Trailer Profile or aGuest Trailer Profile. When a TrailerProfile or Guest Trailer Profile isselected, and a brake gain setting isset for that Trailer Profile, a quicknotice will appear to indicate thatthe system has recalled thatprofile’s brake gain setting.

If a Trailer Profile is already activeand the brake gain setting had beenset for that Trailer Profile, the quicknotice will trigger whenever theignition is turned on.

If there was an error in setting thebrake gain for a Trailer Profile, therewill be a notification. This pop-upwill not appear if the Guest TrailerProfile is active or if there is notrailer connected.

Trailer brake gain should be set fora specific trailering condition andmust be adjusted anytime vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

Editing a Trailer Profile

Trailer Profile View

Touch to edit any of the followingoptions in the Trailer Profile view:

. Trailer Name

. Towing Assistance Setup

. Tire Pressure Setup

. Trailer Maintenance

. Mileage


Driving and Operating 319. Average Fuel Economy

. Reverse Lights Alert

. Electric Brakes Alert

Touch Save to save the new valueto the Trailer Profile. Touching Backwill still save the previously enteredinformation.

Trailer Name

Touch to edit the Trailer Profile’sname. Use at least one characterand no spaces. Touch Save.

Towing Assistance Setup

A trailer should be connected tocomplete this portion of profilesetup.

Touch to set up the TransparentTrailer feature for the Trailer Profile.See "Transparent Trailer Setup"under "Towing Assistance" fordetails on the setup.

Tire Pressure Setup

Touch to set up the Trailer TirePressure Monitoring System(TTPMS) for the Trailer Profile. See“Trailer Tire Pressure Setup”

previously in this section for detailson the setup. Also, touch TirePressure Setup if the trailer tireswere rotated or if the tire pressuresensors in the tires were replacedfor this Trailer Profile. The vehiclewill need to relearn the tire sensorsand their locations.

If TTPMS had been set uppreviously, the Select Number ofSensors screen will appear aftertouching Tire Pressure Setup. If thenumber of sensors has changed,select the number and touch Next.

If a new number of sensors isselected, the Relearn Sensorspop-up will appear. Touch Cancel togo back or touch Relearn tooverwrite the current sensors andbegin the relearning process. See“Trailer Tire Pressure Setup”previously in this section.

If number of sensors has notchanged, touch Next and the Learnsensors screen will appear.

On the Learn Sensors screen.Touch Relearn to overwrite thecurrent sensors and begin the

relearning process. See “Trailer TirePressure Setup” previously in thissection.

On the Learn Sensors screen, touchNext to go to the EditRecommended Tire Pressurescreen.

On the Edit Recommended TirePressure screen, touch a number onthe keypad to change the

Recommended Tire Pressure for thetrailer’s tires. This will change thenumber at which the vehicle

displays alerts related to trailer tirepressure. Touch Done to return tothe Trailer Profile view.

Trailer Maintenance

Touch to view a list of maintenancereminders for the Trailer Profile.

Touch a reminder to view, reset,delete, or edit it.

Reset Reminder

Touch Maintenance Complete in thereminder view to reset the reminder.On the pop-up, touch Reset to resetthe time and mileage values for the



reminder. Touch Cancel to return tothe previous view and nothing willchange.

Edit Reminder

Touch to edit the mileage or timesettings for the reminder. TouchSave to save the new settings to theTrailer Profile.

Delete Reminder

Touch to delete the maintenancereminder. On the pop-up, touchDelete to delete the reminder ortouch Cancel to return to theprevious view and nothing willchange.

New Maintenance Reminder

Touch + New MaintenanceReminder to set up a new reminder.Suggested reminders that werepreviously set will have checkmarksnext to them. Suggested remindersthat have not been set will haveempty boxes next to them. Themaximum number of remindersis 50.

Mileage

Touch to edit the Trailer Profile’smileage.

Effect on Maintenance Reminders

If the mileage is reset or changed,and mileage has alreadyaccumulated, any maintenancereminders that have been set up willbe adjusted accordingly.

Average Fuel Economy

Touch to reset the average fueleconomy for the Trailer Profile.Touch Reset to change, or touchCancel to go back to theprevious view.

Reverse Lights Alert

Turn on to receive failure messagesabout the reverse lights. Turn off tonot receive failure messages aboutthe reverse lights, unless they arelater detected. This setting cannotbe edited when the Trailer Profile isinactive or when the trailer isdisconnected.

Electric Brakes Alert

Turn on to receive failure messagesabout the electric trailer brakes.Turn off to not receive failuremessages about the electric trailerbrakes, unless they are laterdetected. This setting cannot beedited when the Trailer Profile isinactive or when the trailer isdisconnected.

Delete Trailer

Touch to delete the Trailer Profileand all of its settings.

On the pop-up, touch Delete todelete the Trailer Profile. TouchCancel to dismiss the pop-up andreturn to the previous view.

Settings View

Within the Trailering App, touch theSettings tab to modify the followingsettings:

. Trailer Detection Alert

. Maintenance Alerts

. Theft Alert

. Tow/Haul Mode Reminder



Trailer Detection Alert

The Trailer Detection Alert settingwill be on by default. Turn it off todisable the Trailer Detection pop-upfrom displaying when a trailer isconnected. The Guest Trailer Profilewill become the active TrailerProfile, unless another Trailer Profileis selected manually through theTrailering App. If this setting isdisabled while a Custom TrailerProfile is active, that Trailer Profilewill remain the active profile until thetrailer is disconnected.

Maintenance Alerts

Touch Maintenance Alerts to viewthe Maintenance Alerts settingspage. These alerts are based on theTrailer Profile, so the settings foreach Trailer Profile must be turnedon or off. Touch a profile to viewmore information or adjust thesetting for that profile.

The setting will be on by default foreach profile. All Maintenance Alertsfor that active Trailer Profile will bereceived.

Turn a setting off to not receive anyof the Maintenance Alerts when thatTrailer Profile is active.

Theft Alert

A theft alert can be set if a trailer isconnected and the alert is enabled.When the trailer is disconnectedand the vehicle is off, an alarm willsound.

Touch Theft Alert in Settings to viewthe Theft Alert settings page. Thesealerts are based on the TrailerProfile, so the settings for eachTrailer Profile must be turned on oroff. Touch a profile to view moreinformation or adjust the setting forthat profile.

This setting will be off by default foreach Trailer Profile, including theGuest Trailer Profile.

A smartphone will receive anotification that the trailer related tothe selected Trailer Profile isdisconnected from the vehicle, if thesetting is on for the active TrailerProfile, the vehicle has an OnStar orconnected service plan and the

smartphone number has beenadded to the account for thisnotification.

If the setting is turned off for a givenTrailer Profile, the smartphone willnot receive this security notificationeven if the Trailer Profile is active.

Tow/Haul Mode Reminder

This is a reminder to turn on theTow/Haul Mode when towing atrailer. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 227.

Touch Tow/Haul Mode Reminder inSettings to view the Tow/Haul ModeReminder settings page. Thesealerts are based on the TrailerProfile, so the settings for eachTrailer Profile must be turned on oroff. Touch a profile to view moreinformation or to adjust the settingfor that profile.

This setting will default to OFF foreach Trailer Profile, including theGuest Trailer Profile.



If Tow/Haul Mode is off and thissetting is on for a Trailer Profile,each time the ignition is turned on areminder will appear to turn on Tow/Haul Mode when the Trailer Profileis active.

If Tow/Haul Mode is on and thissetting is on for a Trailer Profile, thereminder will not appear when theTrailer Profile is active.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 137. A device connectedto the DLC — such as anaftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 82 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 82.

For information on wiring auxiliaryswitches, see www.gmupfitter.comor contact your dealer.



Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment

Caution

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph)with a snow plow mounted to thevehicle. The vehicle couldoverheat and be damaged.

Before installing a snow plow on thevehicle, follow these guidelines:

Caution

If the vehicle does not have thesnow plow prep package, RPOVYU, adding a plow can damagethe vehicle, and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Unless the vehicle wasbuilt to carry a snow plow, do notadd one to the vehicle. If thevehicle has RPO VYU, then thepayload the vehicle can carry willbe reduced when a snow plow is

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

installed. The vehicle can bedamaged if either the front or rearaxle ratings or the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) areexceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:

. The options the vehicle camewith, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers to be carried.

. The weight of items added to thevehicle, like a tool box ortruck cap.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo to be carried.

For example, if the snow plowweighs 318 kg (700 lb), the totalweight of all occupants and cargoinside the cab should not exceed135 kg (300 lb). This means that youmay only be able to carry onepassenger. Even this may be too

much if there is other equipmentalready adding to the weight of thevehicle.

To safely carry a snow plow on thevehicle:

. Follow all aftermarket snow plowmanufacturer’s instructions forthe operation and transportationof the snow plow.

. With a snow plow attached, theengine coolant temperaturegauge may show a highertemperature than while drivingwithout one. The snow plowcould block the airflow to theradiator. This could be morenoticeable as vehicle speedincreases. At speeds above72 km (45 mph), this may causethe engine coolant to overheat.

. To increase the airflow, move thesnow plow blade postion.

. If driving more than 24 km(15 mi), angle the plow bladeposition.


324 Driving and Operating. Make sure the weight on the

front and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Rear ballast may be required toensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual weight at thefront axle may be less than thefront axle rating.

. The snow plow manufacturer orinstaller can assist indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snow plow/vehiclecombination does not exceedthe GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) and the frontaxle weight of the vehicle with fullfuel and passengers. This is theamount of weight that can be addedto the front axle before reaching thefront GAWR.

United States

Canada

The front axle reserve capacity forthe vehicle is in the lower rightcorner of the Certification/Tire label.

To calculate the amount of weightany front accessory, such as a snowplow, is adding to the front axle, usethis formula:



(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight theaccessory is adding to thefront axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lb) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheelbase is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.)/W.B. =(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg(980 lb)

This means if the front axle reservecapacity is more than 445 kg(980 lb), the snow plow could beadded without exceeding thefront GAWR.

Heavier equipment can be added onthe front of the vehicle if less cargoor fewer passengers are carried,or by positioning cargo toward therear. This reduces the load on thefront. However, the front GAWR,rear GAWR, and Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) must neverbe exceeded.

{ Warning

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) but not haveenough weight on the rear axle tohave proper braking performance.If the brakes cannot workproperly, the vehice could crash.Always follow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio.Maintaining a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.

Total vehicle reserve capacity is thedifference between the GVWR andthe weight of the truck with full fueland passengers. It is the amount ofweight that can be added to thevehicle before reaching the GVWR.



Reserve capacity numbers areintended as a guide when selectingthe amount of equipment or cargothe truck can carry. If unsure of thevehicle's front, rear, or total weight,go to a weigh station and weigh thevehicle. Your dealer can also helpwith this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle is in the lower rightcorner of the Certification/Tire labelas shown previously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. Owners should be awarethat, as manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removedwhich could affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapta pickup to permit its safe use witha specialized body should beinstalled by the body builder.


Vehicle Care 327

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 328California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 329

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 341Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Engine Air Filter LifeSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 344Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 351Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 354Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Brake Pad Life System . . . . . . . 356Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Battery - North America . . . . . . 358Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 362Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 363Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 364

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 364Windshield Replacement . . . . . 365Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Headlamp AimingFront Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . 366

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 369

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 370Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 370Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 381Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385


328 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 403Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 418

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 424Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 329

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 358andJump Starting - North America0 419 and the back cover.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inelectronic keys, may containperchlorate materials. PerchlorateMaterial – special handling mayapply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 82.


330 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seePublication Ordering Information0 471.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 82.

If equipped with remote vehiclestart, open the hood beforeperforming any service work toprevent remote starting the vehicleaccidentally. See Remote VehicleStart 0 25.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 456.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Hood

{ Warning

For vehicles with auto enginestop/start, turn the vehicle offbefore opening the hood. If the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle is on, the engine will startwhen the hood is opened. You orothers could be injured.

{ Warning

Components under the hood canget hot from running the engine.To help avoid the risk of burningunprotected skin, never touchthese components until they havecooled, and always use a glove ortowel to avoid direct skin contact.

Clear any snow from the hoodbefore opening.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release lever withthei symbol. It is on thelower left side of the instrumentpanel.


Vehicle Care 331

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand locate the secondaryrelease lever under the frontcenter of the hood. Push thesecondary hood release leverto the right to release.

3. After you have partially liftedthe hood, the gas strut systemwill automatically lift the hoodand hold it in the fully openposition.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, besure all filler caps are onproperly, and all tools areremoved.

2. Pull the hood down until thestrut system is no longerholding up the hood.

3. Allow the hood to fall. Check tomake sure the hood is latchedcompletely. Repeat thisprocess with additional force ifnecessary.

{ Warning

Do not drive the vehicle if thehood is not latched completely.The hood could open fully, blockyour vision, and cause a crash.You or others could be injured.Always close the hood completelybefore driving.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)will display a message if the hood isnot fully closed, and the vehicle ismoving. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.


332 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.7L L4 Engine (L3B)


Vehicle Care 333

1. Remote Negative (–) Location.See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 419.

2. Positive (+) Terminal (UnderCover). See Jump Starting -North America 0 419.

3. Battery - North America 0 358.

4. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 371.

5. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 346.

6. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 339.

7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 339.

8. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem 0 346.

9. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 344.

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid 0 357.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 354.


334 Vehicle Care

4.3L V6 Engine (LV3)


Vehicle Care 335













336 Vehicle Care

5.3L V8 Engine (L84) Shown, 5.3L V8 Engine (L82) and 6.2L V8 Engine (L87) Similar


Vehicle Care 337













338 Vehicle Care

6.6L V8 Engine (L8T)


Vehicle Care 339






6. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 346.

7. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 354.


9. Auxiliary Battery. Battery -North America 0 358.






Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 341.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 332 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


340 Vehicle Care

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check theoil level.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking theengine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves whenchecking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 458.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If the oil level is

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

above the operating range (i.e.,the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range), theengine could be damaged. Drainthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle, and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 332 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.


Vehicle Care 341

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil for the 5.3L and 6.2LV8 engines.

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil for the 2.7L L4, 4.3LV6 and 6.6L V8 engines. ColdTemperature Operation: In an areaof extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), use SAE 0W-30 oil. An oilof this viscosity grade will provideeasier cold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors which


342 Vehicle Care

include engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when the systemhas calculated that oil life has beendiminished, a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on toindicate that an oil change isnecessary. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 mi). It is possible that, if drivingunder the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. For vehicles without theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, an oil change is neededwhen the REMAINING OIL LIFEpercentage is near 0%. Your dealerhas trained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to check

the oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the oil life percentageon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Press the thumbwheel on thesteering wheel, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DIC

controls, for several seconds.When the confirmationmessage displays, select YES.The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Display the oil life percentageon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Fully press the acceleratorpedal slowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. If the display changes to 100%,the system is reset.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and itcomes back on when the vehicle isstarted and/or the oil life percentageis near 0%, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.


Vehicle Care 343

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See PublicationOrdering Information 0 471.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage may

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use the correctautomatic transmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 441. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

Engine Air Filter LifeSystemIf equipped, this feature providesthe engine air filter’s remaining lifeand best timing for a change. Thetiming to change an engine air filterdepends on driving andenvironmental conditions.

When to Change the EngineAir Filter

When the Driver Information Center(DIC) displays a message to replacethe engine air filter at the next oilchange, follow this timing.

When the DIC displays a messageto replace the engine air filter soon,replace the engine air filter at theearliest convenience.

The system must be reset after theengine air filter is changed.

If the DIC displays a message tocheck the engine air filter system,see your dealer.

How to Reset the Engine AirFilter Life System

To reset:

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

2. Display the Air Filter Life on theDIC. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level)0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.


344 Vehicle Care

3. Press T on the steering wheel,or press the trip odometer resetstem if the vehicle does nothave DIC controls, to move tothe Reset/Disable display area.Select Reset then press thethumbwheel or press the resetstem for several seconds.

4. Press the thumbwheel or thereset stem to confirm the reset.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is onthe driver side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 332.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

If the vehicle is not equipped withthe engine air filter life system seeMaintenance Schedule 0 441 forintervals on inspecting andreplacing the engine air cleanerfilter.

How to Inspect/Replace theEngine Air Cleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Do not clean the engine aircleaner/filter or components withwater or compressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

5.3L V8 Engine (L84) Shown, 2.7LL4 Engine (L3B), 4.3L V6 Engine(LV3), 5.3L V8 Engine (L82), and6.2L V8 Engine (L87) Similar

1. Air Duct Clamp2. Electrical Harness

Connector3. Screws

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 332.


Vehicle Care 345

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air ductclamp (1).

3. Disconnect the electricalharness connector (2) from thecover.

4. Remove the three screws ontop of the cover of the housing,then slide and lift the cover.

5. Lift and remove the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Lightly tap and shake theengine air cleaner/filter, awayfrom the vehicle, to releaseloose dust and dirt. Replacethe engine air filter if damaged.

7. Reverse steps 2–5 to reinstallthe engine air cleaner/filtercover housing.

8. If equipped, reset the engineair filter life system afterreplacing the engine air filter.See Engine Air Filter LifeSystem 0 343.


1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 332.

2. Remove the eight screws ontop of the cover of the housing,then lift the cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter.

6. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

7. If equipped, reset the engineair filter life system afterreplacing the engine air filter.see Engine Air Filter LifeSystem 0 343.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present ifthe engine backfires.


346 Vehicle Care

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

2.7L L4 Engine (L3B)

4.3L V6 Engine (LV3)

5.3L V8 Engine (L84) Shown, 5.3LV8 Engine (L82) and 6.2LV8 Engine (L87) Similar

1. Engine Electric CoolingFans (Out of View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.


Vehicle Care 347


1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ Warning

Do not touch heater, radiator, a/cpipes or hoses, or other engineparts. They can be very hot andcan burn you. Do not run theengine if there is a leak; allcoolant could leak out. That could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause an engine fire and canburn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 351.

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. With

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

plain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.


348 Vehicle Care

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 332.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

All Engines Except 6.6L V8 (L8T)Engine

6.6L V8 (L8T) Engine Only

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, wait until it cools down. Thecoolant level should be at or abovethe indicated mark. If it is not, theremay be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the indicatedmark, see the following sections onhow to add coolant to the coolantsurge tank following.


Vehicle Care 349

Automatic Coolant Service FillInstructions (L3B Engine)

See 3.0L Duramax Dieselsupplement for the diesel engineprocedure.

If equipped, this feature assists infilling and removing air from thecooling system after service ofcomponents or when coolant isadded after being too low.

To activate the fill and air removalprocess:

1. With a cold system, addcoolant to the indicated markon the surge tank.

2. Replace the cap on thesurge tank.

3. Connect the vehicle to abattery charger.

4. Set the ignition to Service orAccessory Mode. See IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access)0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.

5. Turn off the air conditioning.

6. Set the parking brake.

7. At the same time, press theaccelerator and the brake forautomatic transmissionvehicles for two seconds, thenrelease.

At the end of the cycle, check thecoolant level in the surge tank andadd coolant if it is low. Turn off thevehicle, allow the Electronic ControlModule (ECM) to go to sleep, abouttwo minutes, and repeat Steps 3–7.

Listen for pump activation andmovement of the control valveswhile watching the level of thecoolant in the surge tank. If the tankempties, turn the ignition off,carefully remove the surge tank cap,refill to the indicated mark, andrepeat Steps 3–6. The fill and airremoval process will run forapproximately 10 minutes.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank forGasoline Engines Except L3B

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Cooling System” in theDuramax diesel supplement for theproper coolant fill procedure.

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheat

(Continued)


350 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

warning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and could

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

cause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the fullcold mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90 °C (195 °F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theindicated mark.

5. Replace the pressure captightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.


Vehicle Care 351

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge 0 133.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program0 466.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

2.7L L4, 4.3L V6, 5.3L V8, and 6.2LV8 Engines

Check to see if the engine coolingfans are running. If the engine isoverheating, the fans should berunning. If they are not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

If the engine or transmission detectsan impending hot fluid condition,then the transmission may forceupshifts to limit temperatures.Downshifts may also be preventedin this instance. Normal operationmay continue unless the displayindicates there is a hot conditionand engine should be idled.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.


352 Vehicle Care

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

The 2.7L L4 engine will shut downautomatically if the ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage displays.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing0 292.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message displays, anoverheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps to prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows the


Vehicle Care 353

vehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

If the engine or transmission detectsan impending hot fluid condition,then the transmission may forceupshifts to limit temperatures.Downshifts may also be preventedin this instance. Normal operationmay continue unless the displayindicates there is a hot conditionand engine should be idled.

Caution

After driving in the overheatedengine protection operatingmode, the engine oil will beseverely degraded. Any repairsperformed before the engine iscool may cause engine damage.Allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change theoil, and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 339.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

All Engines Except 6.6LV8 Engine (L8T)

The vehicle has electric coolingfan(s). The fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned off. This is normal and noservice is required.

6.6L V8 Engine (L8T) Only

The vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.


354 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir isin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 332 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Set the ignition off and let theengine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the hashed area betweenthe ADD and FULL marks.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452. Always use theproper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.


Vehicle Care 355

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 332 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allows

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

for fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.


356 Vehicle Care

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications 0 458.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Pad Life System

When to Change Brake Pads

This vehicle has a system thatestimates the remaining life of thefront and rear brake pads. Brakepad life is displayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), along witha percentage for each axle. Thesystem must be reset every time thebrake pads are changed.

When the system has determinedthat the brake pads need to bereplaced, a message will display,which may include mileageremaining.

Brake pads should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

How to Reset the Brake PadLife System

The system will automatically detectwhen significantly worn brake padsare replaced. When the ignition isturned on after new pads and wearsensors are installed, a messagewill display. Follow the prompts toreset the system.

The brake pad life system can alsobe manually reset:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on theDIC. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level)0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Press the thumbwheel or thetrip odometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons. Select front or rearpads as appropriate.

3. Select YES on the confirmationmessage, or press the tripodometer reset stem on a base


Vehicle Care 357

level DIC. Repeat for pads onthe other axle if they were alsoreplaced.

How to Disable the Brake PadLife System

The brake pad life system can beturned off. This may be necessary ifaftermarket brake pads without wearsensors are installed. When thesystem is turned off, the front andrear brake pad life percentages willnot display. However, the built-inwear indicators that make ahigh-pitched warning sound whenthe brake pads are worn can stilldetermine when the pads should bereplaced. See Brakes 0 355.

To turn off the brake pad life system:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on theDIC. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level)0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

2. Select DISABLE.

To turn the brake pad life systemback on, follow the above steps butselect ENABLE in Step 2.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with GM approved DOT 4(1500) or DOT 3 (2500/3500) brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 332 for the location ofthe reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on alevel surface, the brake fluid levelshould be between the minimumand maximum marks on the brakefluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.


358 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 139.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluidat the specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid, as indicated onthe reservoir cap, from a clean,

sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 332 for battery location.

Stop/Start System

Vehicles equipped with a 2.7L L3B,3.0L LM2, 5.3L L84 or 6.2L L87 areequipped with a Stop/Start systemto shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. See Stop/StartSystem 0 213.

Vehicles with the Stop/Start systemhave an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM)12-volt battery. Installation of astandard 12-volt battery will result inreduced 12-volt battery life. Whenusing a 12-volt battery charger onthe 12-volt AGM battery, somechargers have an AGM batterysetting on the charger. If available,use the AGM setting on the chargerto limit charge voltage to 14.8 volts.Follow the charger manufacturer’sinstructions.


Vehicle Care 359

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 329 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 419 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Negative Battery CableDisconnection

{ Warning

Before disconnecting the negativebattery cable, turn off all features,turn the ignition off, and removethe key, if equipped, from thevehicle. If this is not done, you orothers could be injured, and thevehicle could be damaged.

Caution

If the battery is disconnected withthe ignition on or the vehicle inRetained Accessory Power(RAP), the OnStar back-upbattery will be permanentlydischarged and will need to bereplaced.

1. Make sure the lamps, features,and accessories are turned off.

2. Turn the ignition off andremove the key, if equipped.


360 Vehicle Care

For vehicles equipped with the Stop/Start system:

1. Loosen and remove thenegative battery cable nut (1)at the battery sensorconnection.

2. Remove the negative batterycable (2) from the batterysensor stud.

3. Cover the negative batterycable terminal, battery sensorstud, and negative battery postwith a non-conductive materialto prevent any contact with thenegative battery cable.

For vehicles not equipped with theStop/Start system:

1. Loosen the negative batterycable nut (1).

2. Remove the negative batterycable clamp (2) from thenegative battery post.

3. Cover the negative batterycable clamp, and negativebattery post with anon-conductive material toprevent any contact with thenegative battery cable.

Negative Battery CableReconnection

Caution

When reconnecting the battery:

. Use the original nut from thevehicle to secure thenegative battery cable. Donot use a different nut.If you need a replacementnut, see your dealer.

. Tighten the nut with a handtool. Do not use an impactwrench or power tools totighten the nut.

The vehicle could be damaged ifthese guidelines are not followed.

Caution

Do not use paints, lubricants,or corrosion inhibitors on the nutthat secures the negative batterycable to the vehicle. This coulddamage the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 361

For vehicles equipped with the Stop/Start system:

1. Install the negative batterycable to the batterysensor stud.

2. Install the negative batterycable nut to the battery sensorstud and tighten.

3. Turn the ignition on.

For vehicles not equipped with theStop/Start system:

1. Install the negative batterycable clamp to the negativebattery post.

2. Tighten the negative batterycable nut.

3. Turn the ignition on.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 441 to determine when to checkthe lubricant.

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule0 441 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Front AxleWhen to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the front axle fluid unless aleak is suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.


362 Vehicle Care

Rear AxleWhen to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the rear axle fluid unless aleak is suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.

Noise Control System

NOISE EMISSIONSWARRANTY

General Motors LLC, warrants to thefirst person who purchases thisvehicle for purposes other thanresale and to each subsequentpurchaser that this vehicle asmanufactured by General Motors

LLC, was designed, built andequipped to conform at the time itleft General Motors LLC’s controlwith all applicable U.S. EPA NoiseControl Regulations. This warrantycovers this vehicle as designed,built and equipped by GeneralMotors LLC, and is not limited toany particular part, component orsystem of the vehicle manufacturedby General Motors LLC. Defects indesign, assembly or in any part,component or system of the vehicleas manufactured by General MotorsLLC, which, at the time it leftGeneral Motors LLC’s control,caused noise emissions to exceedFederal standards, are covered bythis warranty for the life of thevehicle.

TAMPERING WITH NOISECONTROL SYSTEMPROHIBITED

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes of

maintenance, repair,or replacement, of any deviceor element of designincorporated into any newvehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale ordelivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is inuse; or

2. the use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyundercab insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if so equipped, inoperativeso as to allow engine speed toexceed manufacturer specifications.

Modification of the engine controlsystem or calibration.


Vehicle Care 363

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of fan clutch orrendering clutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud.

Air Intake:

. Removal of air cleaner silencer.

. Reversing air cleaner cover.

Exhaust:

. Removal of muffler, catalyticconverter, and/or resonator.

. Removal of exhaust pipes andexhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with Key Accessignition, while parked, and with theparking brake set, try to turn theignition off in each shift leverposition. The ignition should turn tooff only when the shift lever is inP (Park).


364 Vehicle Care

The ignition key should come outonly when the ignition is off. Contactyour dealer if service is required.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should bereplaced periodically. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 454.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.


Vehicle Care 365

2. Lift up on the latch in themiddle of the wiper bladewhere the wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough torelease it from the J-hookedend of the wiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield Replacement

HUD System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designedfor HUD or the HUD image maylook out of focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to bereplaced and the vehicle isequipped with a front camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems, aGM replacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgateis held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.


366 Vehicle Care

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 441.

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate

Headlamp Aiming

Front Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


Vehicle Care 367

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescentbulbs with aftermarket LEDreplacement bulbs. This cancause damage to the vehicleelectrical system.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

Base Level HeadlampAssembly

1. Turn Signal Lamps

Headlamp Replacement

See your dealer for headlampreplacement.

Turn Signal LampReplacement

Base Level

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb socket.

4. Replace the bulb and reverseSteps 1–3 to reinstall.

Uplevel

See your dealer for headlampreplacement.


368 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

Base Level Taillamp Assembly

1. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp2. Back-Up Lamp

Uplevel Taillamp Assembly

See your dealer for taillampreplacement.

It is recommended to replace thegrommets when replacing a bulb.See your dealer.

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws.

4. Pull the rear lamp assemblyoutward and rearward awayfrom the box side to remove itfrom the vehicle.

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise.

6. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

7. Replace the bulb and reverseSteps 1–5 to reinstall.


Vehicle Care 369

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo LampThis procedure is for the regular cabonly. For crew cab and double cabsee your dealer.

1. Cargo Lamp Bulbs2. Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

License Plate LampTo replace the bulb:

1. Reach behind the rear bumperand locate the bulb.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

3. Replace the bulb and reverseStep 2 to reinstall.


370 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the left instrument panelfuse block. The same amperagefuse can also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuitbreakers. Use of an oversizedfuse or circuit breaker can resultin a vehicle fire. You and otherscould be seriously injured orkilled.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.


Vehicle Care 371

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe passenger side of the vehicle for1500 and driver side of vehicle for2500/3500.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel end cap.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


372 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

1 High-beam left

Fuses Usage

2 High-beam right

3 Headlamp left

Fuses Usage

4 Headlamp right

6 TIM

7 –

8 Fog lamp

9 VKM

10 –

11 Police upfitter

12 –

13 Washer front

14 Washer rear

15 MSB driver

16 –

17 IECL 1

19 DC/AC inverter

20 IECR 2 (LD) /EBCM2 (HD)

21 MSB pass

22 IECL 2

24 EBCM 1

25 REC


Vehicle Care 373

Fuses Usage

26 –

27 Horn

28 –

29 –

30 –

31 –

32 Rear windowdefogger

33 Heated mirror

34 Parking lamp left

37 Euro trailer

38 TIM

39 –

40 Misc ignition

41 Trailerparking lamp

42 Park lamp right

44 –

45 Second fuel pump

46 Engine controlmodule ignition

Fuses Usage

47 Transmissioncontrol moduleignition

48 –

49 Transmissioncontrol module

50 A/C clutch

51 Transfer casecontrol module

52 Front wiper

53 Centerhigh-mountedstop lamp

54 Trailerreverse lamp

55 Trailerback-up lamp

56 SADS

57 TTPM

58 Starter motor (LD &HD DSL)

60 Active fuelmanagement 1

Fuses Usage

61 VES

62 Integrated chassiscontrolmodule/CVS

63 Trailer battery

65 Auxiliaryunderhoodelectrical center

66 Cooling fanmotor left

67 Active fuelmanagement 2

68 –

69 Starter Pinion (LD)/ Starter Motor(HD Gas)

71 Cooling fan

72 Cooling fan right

73 Trailer stop/turnlamp left

74 TIM

75 DEFC


374 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

76 Electric RNG BDS

78 Engine controlmodule

79 Auxiliary battery

80 Cabincooling pump

81 Trailer stop/turnlamp right

82 TIM

83 FTZM

84 Trailer brake

85 ENG

86 Engine controlmodule

87 Injector B even

88 O2 B sensor

89 O2 A sensor

90 Injector A odd

91 Engine controlmodule throttlecontrol

92 Cool fan clutch

Relays Usage

5 Headlamp

18 DC/AC inverter

23 Rear windowdefogger

35 Parking lamp

36 Run/Crank

43 Second fuel pump

59 A/C clutch

64 Starter Motor (LD &HD DSL) / CoolFan Clutch(HD Gas)

70 Starter Pinion (LD)/ Starter Motor(HD Gas)

77 Powertrain

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.


Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock. A fuse puller is available inthe left instrument panel end cap.


Vehicle Care 375


Fuses Usage

F1 Rear heated seatsleft/right

F3 Euro trailer

F4 –

F5 Front Bolster

F6 Heated and ventilatedseats left/right

F8 Rear seatentertainment/Theftdeterrent

F9 Passive entry/Passivestart/Driver seatmodule

F10 –

F11 Sunshade

F12 Passenger power seat

F13 Export power take off/Special equipmentoption 1

F14 –

F15 –

F16 AMP

Fuses Usage

F17 MFEG

F18 –

F20 Endgate

F22 Rear sliding window

F23 –

F24 –

F25 –

F26 –

F27 –

CircuitBreakers

Usage

CB1 –

Relays Usage

K1 Rear slidingwindow open

K2 Rear sliding windowclose

K3 MFEG major 1

K4 MFEG minor 1


376 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

K5 MFEG minor 2

K6 MFEG major 2

K7 Anti-theft

K8 –

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the frontof the fuse block.

To access the back of the fuseblock:

1. Push the tab at the top of fuseblock down.

2. Pull the top of the fuse blockoutward.

3. Reverse Steps 1–2 to reinstall.


Vehicle Care 377

Back


Fuses Usage

F1 Right doors

F2 Left doors

F3 Universal remotesystem

F4 –

F5 –

F6 Front blower

F8 Lumbar switch

F10 Body controlmodule 6/Body controlmodule 7

F11 Seat/CLM

F12 Body controlmodule 3/Body controlmodule 5

F14 Mirrors/Windowsmodule

F17 Steering wheelcontrols

F18 VPM/OBS DET

Fuses Usage

F19 DLIS

F20 Ventilated seats

F21 NOT R/C

F22 Heated steering wheel

F23 MISC R/C

F24 Instrument panelcluster ignition/Overhead

F25 Heating, ventilation,and air conditioningignition/Heating,ventilation, and airconditioning auxiliary

F26 USB ports/Specialequipment optionretained accessorypower

F27 Accessory poweroutlet/retainedaccessory power

F28 Accessory poweroutlet/Battery


378 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

F30 Sensing anddiagnostic module/Parking brake

F31 Body control module 4

F32 Special equipmentoption/Data linkconnection


F34 Cargo lamp

F40 CGM

F41 Infotainment 1

F42 TCP

F43 –

F44 AVM


F46 Heating, ventilation,and air conditioning/Battery 1

F47 Instrument panelcluster/Battery

F48 Transmission controlmodule

Fuses Usage


F50 –

F51 Battery 1

F52 Battery 2

F53 –

F54 Sunroof

F55 Driver power seat

F56 DC DC TRANS 1

F57 DC DC TRANS 2

F58 Infotainment 2

CircuitBreakers

Usage

1 Accessory poweroutlet 2

2 Accessory poweroutlet 1/CigaretteLighter



Relays Usage

K1 Run/Crank

K2 Retained accessorypower/Accessory 1

K4 Retained accessorypower/Accessory 2

K5 –


Vehicle Care 379

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overall


380 Vehicle Care

performance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 380.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow covered

roads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 399.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has 275/60R20 or275/50R22 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile tires.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.


Vehicle Care 381

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving 0 191.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more unevenly than othertires. Consider rotating the tiresmore frequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 396.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger and light truck tiresidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specification

code molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).


382 Vehicle Care

The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 402.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 387 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

(8) Temporary Use Only : Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with theproper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 418.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


Vehicle Care 383

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load :Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 387 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad : Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 387 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire size.


384 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, it

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire : The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, it


Vehicle Care 385

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range : Load Range.

(7) Service Description : Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 387.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.


386 Vehicle Care

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.


Vehicle Care 387

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 387 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 399.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 402.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 200.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.


388 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 200. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 418 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the


Vehicle Care 389

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, putsadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

This could cause a crash, andyou or others could be killed.Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speedoperation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicleto be driven at high speeds, makesure the tires are rated forhigh-speed operation, are inexcellent condition, and are set tothe correct cold tire inflationpressure for the vehicle load.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire


390 Vehicle Care

tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 390.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in

the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can be


Vehicle Care 391

viewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Base Level) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 200, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 387.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 396, Tire Rotation 0 396 andTires 0 379.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignition

cycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed and


392 Vehicle Care

the sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 399.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turnsignal lamp will stop flashingand briefly turn solid.

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Do notexceed the maximum pressure

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

listed on the tire sidewall. SeeTire Sidewall Labeling 0 381 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

If the tire is overinflated by morethan 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn willsound multiple times and the turnsignal lamp will continue to flash forseveral seconds after filling stops.To release and correct the pressure,while the turn signal lamp is stillflashing, briefly press the center ofthe valve stem. When therecommended pressure is reached,the horn sounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers areon, the tire fill alert visual feedbackwill not work properly.


Vehicle Care 393

The TPMS will not activate the tirefill alert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from theinflation device is not sufficientto inflate the tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in thehorn or turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the vehicle.

3. Uplevel DIC Only: Make surethe Tire Pressure info pageoption is turned on. The infopages on the DIC can beturned on and off through theOptions menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (BaseLevel) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148.

4. If the vehicle has an uplevelDIC, use the DIC controls onthe right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TirePressure screen under the DICinfo page.


394 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has a base levelDIC, use the trip odometerreset stem to scroll to the TirePressure screen.

5. If the vehicle has an uplevelDIC, press and hold thethumbwheel located in thecenter of the DIC controls onthe right side of the steeringwheel.

If the vehicle has a base levelDIC, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem for aboutfive seconds. A messageasking if the process shouldbegin should appear. Selectyes and press the tripodometer reset stem to confirmthe selection.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Trailer Tire PressureMonitoring Operation

If equipped, the Trailer TirePressure Monitoring System(TTPMS) is designed to monitor thepressure of the trailer tires and warnthe driver when a low pressurecondition exists. TTPMS sensors forfour tires are provided. The systemcan accommodate a trailer with upto six tires if additional sensors arepurchased from the dealer. Also, thesystem can be paired with up to fiveindividual trailers.

Prior to use, the vehicle must learnthe sensors by following thelearning process. See Trailering App0 310.


Vehicle Care 395

Contact your trailer service center ortire service center to have thepressure sensors installed insidethe trailer tires. The technicianshould insert the sensor stemthrough the hole in the trailer wheel.When the sensor is correctlypositioned, the nut on the sensorstem should be tightened to 8Y(6 lb ft). When mounting the trailertire onto the trailer wheel be carefulnot to damage the sensor.

The Trailering App can be used toview the tire pressures after therecommended trailer tire pressureshave been entered. Refer to the

trailer tire placard on the trailer orthe trailer tire sidewall for therecommended tire pressure.

The system is compatible with trailertires that have placard pressurevalues from 103 - 689 kpa(15 - 100 psi). The hole in the wheelfor the tire stem must be 11.43 mm(0.453 in) in diameter. Use of thepressure sensors on a wheel with adifferent stem hole size could resultin loss of air from the tire.

If a low trailer tire pressure conditionis detected, the TTPMS displays awarning message on the DIC. If thewarning message is displayed, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire placard on thetrailer.

In addition, the TTPMS monitors thetemperature of the trailer tires. If thesystem detects a high temperatureon one or more of the trailer tires, awarning message will be displayedon the DIC. If this warning messageis displayed, stop as soon aspossible, and inspect theoverheated trailer tire. Common

causes for high trailer tiretemperature are underinflation,overloading, or tire damage.

TTPMS Malfunction Message

The TTPMS will not functionproperly if one or more of the trailertire sensors are missing orinoperable. If the system detects amalfunction, a DIC messageindicates that the system requiresservice. Some of the conditions thatcan cause the service message tooccur are:

. One of the trailer tires has beenreplaced with the spare tirewhich does not have a learnedTTPMS sensor. The DICmessage should turn off after thepressure sensor is installed inthe tire, and the learning processis performed successfully. See"TTPMS Sensor LearningProcess" under Trailering App0 310.

. The TTPMS sensor learningprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully. The DICmessage should go off after


396 Vehicle Care

successfully completing thesensor learning process. See"TTPMS Sensor LearningProcess" under Trailering App0 310.

. One or more TTPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. TheDIC message should go offwhen the TTPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensor learningprocess is performedsuccessfully. See "TTPMSSensor Learning Process" underTrailering App 0 310.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTTPMS could cause interferenceto the TTPMS which couldcause loss of signal receptionfrom the sensor.

. If the system does not receivethe signal from an individualsensor, an error message maynot occur until the vehicle hasbeen driver for a period of time.

If the TTPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the DIC messagecomes on and stays on when thetrailer tire pressures have beenchecked and determined to becorrect.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.

Tires are rotated to achieve amore uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires 0 399 andWheel Replacement 0 403.


Vehicle Care 397

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Dual Tire Rotation

When the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheelbolt, or wheel nut is replaced orserviced, check the wheel nuttorque after 160, 1 600, and10 000 km (100, 1,000, and6,000 mi) of driving. For propertorque and wheel nut tighteninginformation, see “Removing theFlat Tire and Installing the SpareTire” under Tire Changing 0 407

and “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications0 458 and “Removing the FlatTire and Installing the SpareTire” under Tire Changing 0 407.

The outer tire on a dual wheelsetup generally wears fasterthan the inner tire. Tires lastlonger and wear more evenly ifthey are rotated. See TireInspection 0 396 andTire Rotation 0 396. Also seeMaintenance Schedule 0 441.

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tire Pressure 0 387, forinformation on proper tireinflation.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels (exceptpolished forged aluminumwheels).

Vehicles with polished forgedaluminum dual wheels havethree unique wheels; a front, arear outer and a rear inner.These wheels cannot be rotatedto another position, however,they can be rotated from left toright to the same position.


398 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas polished forged aluminumdual rear wheels. The sparewheel can be used in anyposition in the event of a flat tire,and can be rotated with the rearinner wheels. After the flat tire isrepaired, if the spare is not onone of the inner rear positions, itmust be replaced by the correctwheel in the front or rear outerpositions.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 387 andVehicle Load Limits 0 200.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 458, and“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing 0 407.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after time.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The wheel could come off andcause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, acloth or a paper towel can beused; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to removeall rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening withwheel bearing grease after awheel change or tire rotation toprevent corrosion or rustbuild-up. Do not get grease onthe flat wheel mounting surfaceor on the wheel nuts or bolts.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), if the vehiclehas one. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 390.


Vehicle Care 399

If the full-size tire is part of thetire rotation, make sure the tirerotated into the spare position isstored securely. Push, pull, andthen try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the wheelwrench/hoist shaft to tighten thecable. See Tire Changing 0 407.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection 0 396 andTire Rotation 0 396 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Toidentify the age of a tire, use the tiremanufacture date which is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. For

example, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria


400 Vehicle Care

Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 381 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniform

tread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 396 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle(two for single rear wheels, fourfor dual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,tread patterns, or types on thesame axle may cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, resultingin a crash or other vehicledamage. Use the same size,load range, and type of tiresas the original tires.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it is

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 401

Warning (Continued)

all right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the winter

tires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 389.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems

(Continued)


402 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

developed for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 399 andAccessories and Modifications0 329.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,

compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on


Vehicle Care 403

specified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level of

performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or the

vehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.


404 Vehicle Care

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced on a dualwheel setup, check the wheel nuttorque after 160,1 600, and10 000 km (100,1,000, and6,000 mi) of driving. For propertorque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”under Capacities and Specifications0 458.

See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 405 formore information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

If the vehicle has LT275/65R18,275/60R20, LT275/65R20,or 275/50R22 size tires, do notuse tire chains. If the vehicle is a1500 Series with LT265/70R17size tires, do not use tire chains.They can damage the vehiclebecause there is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amountof clearance can cause damageto the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of thevehicle, and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 405

Warning (Continued)

manufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Caution

Use tire chains only where legaland only when necessary. Usechains that are the proper size forthe tires. If the vehicle has265/70R17 or 265/65R18 sizetires, they may be installed on thetires of the rear axle only. If thevehicle is a dual rear wheel modeland has LT235/80R17 tires,chains may be installed on thetires of the rear axle only. If the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle has 255/70R17,LT245/75R17, or LT275/70R18size tires, they may be installedon the tires of the front and rearaxle. If the vehicle is a 2500Series with LT265/70R17 sizetires, chains may be installed onthe tires of both the front and rearaxle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If you can hear thechains contacting the vehicle,stop and retighten them. If thecontact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage the vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely to

leak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severely

(Continued)


406 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

underinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 169.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

3. For vehicles with four-wheeldrive with an N (Neutral)transfer case position, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear — not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

6. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.


Vehicle Care 407

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Jack2. Jack Knob3. Tool Kit4. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit5. Wheel Blocks

6. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

The equipment is under the secondrow seats, if equipped, or behind thefront row seats on regular cabmodels.

1. Turn the knob on the jackcounterclockwise to lower thejack head to release the jackfrom its holder.

2. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.

3. Turn the wing nut used toretain the storage bag andtools counterclockwise toremove it.

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Jack Handle Extensions7. Wheel Wrench8. Spare Tire Lock (If

Equipped)9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole10. Hoist End of Extension Tool

1. Open the spare tire lock coveron the bumper and use theignition key to remove thespare tire lock (8). To remove


408 Vehicle Care

the spare tire lock, insert theignition key, turn, and pullstraight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)and the two jack handleextensions (6), as shown.

Spare Tire Cable (If Equipped)

3. If the vehicle is equipped with aspare tire cable disconnect thecable from the attachment onthe frame by unclipping it fromthe frame attachment bracket.

4. Insert the hoist end (openend) (10) of the extensionthrough the hole (9) in the rearbumper.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (10) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

6. Pull the spare tire out fromunder the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 409

7. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

1500 Models

All Other Models

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable andspring.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

9. If equipped with a spare tirecable remove the cable fromthe spare tire by passing theclip through the looped end ofthe cable.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

1. Jack2. Wheel Blocks3. Jack Handle4. Jack Handle Extensions5. Wheel Wrench


410 Vehicle Care

The tools you will be using includethe jack (1), the wheel blocks (2),the jack handle (3), the jack handleextensions (4), and the wheelwrench (5).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 405.

2. If the vehicle has wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise.

If the vehicle has a center capwith wheel nut caps, the wheelnut caps are designed to stay

with the center cap after theyare loosened. Remove theentire center cap.

If the wheel has a smoothcenter cap, concealing accessto the wheel nuts, place thechisel end of the wheel wrenchin the slot on the wheel, andgently pry it out.

If the wheel’s center cap doesnot conceal the wheel nuts, thecenter cap may remain duringwheel removal. If the removedwheel is to be stowed in thehoist, the cap needs to bedetached from the wheel.Access the wheel from the

back side, and use a jackhandle extension to push outthe center cap.

3. Use the wheel wrench and turnit counterclockwise to loosenthe wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts yet.

{ Warning

To avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, disable thepower assist steps before using a

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 411

Warning (Continued)

jack or placing an object underthe vehicle. See Power AssistSteps 0 34.

Front Position — 1500 Models

Front Position — All Other Models

4. If the flat tire is on the front ofthe vehicle, position the jackunder the bracket attached tothe vehicle's frame, behind theflat tire, as shown.

Rear Position — 1500 Models

5. If the flat tire is on the rear,position the jack under the rearaxle about 5 cm (2 in) inboardof the shock absorber bracket.


412 Vehicle Care

Rear Position All Other Models

For all other models, positionthe jack under the rear axlebetween the spring anchor andthe shock absorber bracket.

If a snow plow has been addedto the front of the vehicle, lowerthe snow plow fully beforeraising the vehicle.

Make sure that the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely between thegrooves that are on thejack head.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off andcause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, a

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 413

Warning (Continued)

cloth or a paper towel can beused; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to removeall rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.


414 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 458 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the proper

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 458 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence, asshown, by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.

For vehicles with dual wheels, havea technician check the wheel nuttightness of all wheels with a torquewrench after the first 160, 1 600 and10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi).Repeat this service whenever you

have a tire removed or serviced.See Capacities and Specifications0 458.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall either thecenter cap, or bolt-on hub cap,depending on what the vehicle isequipped with. For center caps,place the cap on the wheel and tapit into place until it seats flush withthe wheel. The cap only goes onone way. Be sure to line up the tabon the center cap with theindentation on the wheel. Forbolt-on hub caps, align the plasticnut caps with the wheel nuts andthen tighten by hand. Then use thewheel wrench to tighten.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 415

Warning (Continued)

collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

{ Warning

Failure to follow these tire storageinstructions carefully could resultin personal injury or propertydamage if the hoist cable fails orif the tire comes loose. Make surethe tire is stored securely beforedriving.

Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stem

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

pointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

Caution

The tire hoist can be damaged ifthere is no tension on the cablewhen using it. To have thenecessary tension, the spare orroad tire and wheel assemblymust be installed on the tire hoistto use it.

{ Warning

An improperly stored spare tirecould come loose and cause acrash. To avoid personal injury orproperty damage, always storethe spare tire when the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Jack Handle Extensions7. Wheel Wrench8. Spare Tire Lock (If

Equipped)9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole10. Hoist End of Extension Tool


416 Vehicle Care

11. Spare Tire Cable (IfEquipped)

1. If equipped with a spare tirecable, reinstall the cable to thespare wheel by looping thecable around a wheel ventwindow then pass the clip endof the cable through the loopedend. The excess cable wireshould be on the valve stemside of the spare tire.

2. Put the tire on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down, andto the rear.

3. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of thewheel. Tilt the wheel retainerplate down and through thecenter wheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. Attach the wheel wrench (7)and extensions (6) together, asshown.

Caution

Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools with the hoistmechanism is not recommendedand could damage the system.Use only the tools supplied withthe hoist mechanism.


Vehicle Care 417

5. Insert the hoist end (10)through the hole (9) in the rearbumper and onto the hoistshaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

6. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer isseated in the wheel opening.

7. If equipped with a spare tirecable, orient the cable byrotating the spare tire so thatthe cable is by the frameattachment location.

8. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

9. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to turn the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrenchto tighten the cable.


418 Vehicle Care

If equipped with a spare tirecable, reattach the clip to theframe attachment bracket. Notethat there may be slack in thecable.

Repeat this tightness checkprocedure when checking thespare tire pressure accordingto the scheduled maintenanceinformation or any time thespare tire is handled due toservice of other components.

Correctly Stored

Incorrectly Stored

10. Reinstall the spare tire lock,if the vehicle has one.

Return the jack and tools to theiroriginal location in the vehicle. See“Removing the Spare Tire andTools.”

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 387andVehicle Load Limits 0 200. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 407.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 381. This spare tire


Vehicle Care 419

should not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure. Repairand replace the road tire as soon asit is convenient, and stow the sparetire for future use.

Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.

This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 358.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)


420 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 329 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

All Engines Except 6.6LV8 Engine (L8T)

1. Good Battery PositiveTerminal

2. Good Battery NegativeTerminal

3. Discharged Battery RemoteNegative Terminal

4. Discharged Battery RemotePositive Terminal

The jump start positive post (1) andnegative post (2) are on the batteryof the vehicle providing the jumpstart.

The jump start positive post (4) andthe negative grounding point (3) forthe discharged battery are on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

The positive jump start connectionfor the discharged battery is under acover. Slide the cover to expose theterminal.


Vehicle Care 421

6.6L V8 Engine (L8T) Only

1. Good Battery PositiveTerminal

2. Good Battery NegativeTerminal

3. Discharged Battery RemotePositive Terminal

4. Discharged Battery RemoteNegative Terminal

The jump start positive post (1) andnegative post (2) are on the batteryof the vehicle providing the jumpstart.

The jump start positive post (3) andthe negative grounding point (4) forthe discharged battery are on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

The positive jump start connectionfor the discharged battery is under acover. Slide the cover to expose theterminal.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If you have a vehicle with adiesel engine with twobatteries, you should knowbefore you begin that,especially in cold weather, youmay not be able to get enoughpower from a single battery in

another vehicle to start yourdiesel engine. If your vehiclehas more than one battery,using the battery that is closerto the starter will reduceelectrical resistance. This islocated on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause anunwanted ground connection.You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) beforesetting the parking brake. If youhave a four-wheel-drive


422 Vehicle Care

vehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not inN (Neutral).

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal isunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. Touncover the positive (+)terminal, open the red plasticcover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overview0 332.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.


Vehicle Care 423

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

7. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the remotepositive (+) terminal of thevehicle with the dischargedbattery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect one end of the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to theremote negative (−) terminal tothe discharged battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.


424 Vehicle Care

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to suspensioncomponents. Use the properstraps around the tires to securethe vehicle. Do not drag a lockedwheel/tire. Use tire skates ordollies under any locked wheel/tire while loading the vehicle. Donot use a sling type lift to tow thevehicle. This could damage thevehicle.

Caution

If the vehicle cannot be shiftedinto Neutral (N), do not use thetow eye to tow the vehicle.Vehicle damage may occur.

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approachangles, if necessary. A towedvehicle should have its drive wheelsoff the ground. Contact RoadsideAssistance or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.

Front Attachment Points

1500

2500/3500

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed car carrier from a flat roadsurface. Do not use theseattachment points to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are


Vehicle Care 425

dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground. Dollytowing is towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels on a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. Before towing the vehicle,become familiar with the locallaws that apply to recreationalvehicle towing. These laws mayvary by region.

. The towing capacity of thetowing vehicle. Read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle can betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong the vehicle can be towed.

. Whether the vehicle has theproper towing equipment. Seeyour dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. Whether the vehicle is ready tobe towed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Follow the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s instructions.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing(Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles andVehicles with a Single-SpeedTransfer Case)

Caution

If a vehicle with two-wheel driveor a single-speed transfer case istowed with all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.


426 Vehicle Care

Two-wheel-drive vehicles andvehicles with a single-speed transfercase should not be towed with allfour wheels on the ground.

Dinghy Towing (Vehicles with aTwo-Speed Transfer Case)

Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drivevehicles with a two-speed transfercase that have an N (Neutral) and a4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) setting.

{ Warning

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can allow the vehicleto move even if the transmissionis in P (Park). You or others couldbe injured. Set the parking brakeand use wheel blocks beforeshifting the transfer case toN (Neutral).

To dinghy tow:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the tow vehicle,facing forward and on a levelsurface.

2. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.


4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive 0 227.

5. With the engine running,release the parking brake andverify that the transfer case isin N (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to D (Drive) andthen to R (Reverse). Thereshould be no movement whileshifting the transmission.

6. Shift the transmission toD (Drive).

7. If equipped with an ignition key,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. If equipped withKeyless Access, turn theengine off. Disregard the Shiftto P (Park) DIC message. SeeIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.

{ Warning

To avoid death, serious injury,or property damage, beforedinghy towing the vehicle, alwaysdisconnect and secure the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 427

Warning (Continued)

negative battery cable and coverthe negative battery post andcable with a non-conductivematerial. If the battery is leftconnected or the battery cablecontacts the post, the ElectricParking Brake may activateduring towing, which could causea crash.

8. Disconnect the negative (–)battery cable. See “NegativeBattery Cable Disconnection”in Battery - North America0 358.

9. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

Caution

If the steering column is locked,vehicle damage may occur.

10. Move the steering wheel tomake sure the steering columnis unlocked.

11. If the vehicle has an ignitionkey, keep it in the towedvehicle in ACC/ACCESSORYto prevent the steering columnfrom locking. If the vehicle isequipped with Keyless Access,keep the RKE transmitteroutside of the vehicle andmanually lock the doors.Access the vehicle by usingthe key in the door lock. SeeDoor Locks 0 26.

Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle

Before disconnecting from the towvehicle:

1. Park on a level surface. Securethe vehicle with wheel blocks.

2. Re-connect the negative (–)battery. See Battery - NorthAmerica 0 358.

3. Turn on the ignition with theengine off. For vehicles with akey, turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. If thevehicle is equipped withKeyless Access, with your footoff the brake pedal, press andhold ENGINE START/STOP forfive seconds until the greenlight comes on in the button.See Ignition Positions (KeylessAccess) 0 208 orIgnition Positions (Key Access)0 210.


5. Disconnect from the towvehicle.


7. Shift the transfer case to 2 m(Two-Wheel Drive High). Whenthe shift to 2 m (Two-WheelDrive High) is complete, thelight in the instrument clusterwill stop flashing and stay lit.See Four-Wheel-Drive Light0 141.


428 Vehicle Care

8. Start the engine. Check thatthe vehicle is in 2 m(Two-Wheel Drive High) bystarting the engine and shiftingthe transmission to D (Drive)and then to R (Reverse). Thereshould be movement of thevehicle while shifting.

9. Shift the transmission toP (Park) and turn off theignition.

10. Release the parking brake andremove the wheel blocks.

11. Reset any lost presets.

The outside temperaturedisplay will default to 0 °C(32 °F) but will reset withnormal usage.

Dolly TowingCaution

Do not tow this vehicle with twowheels on the ground, or vehicledamage could occur. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Dolly towing this vehicle is notallowed with either the front or therear tires on the ground fortwo-wheel drive or four-wheel drive,regardless of transfer case.


Vehicle Care 429

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Warning

Do not power wash any part ofthe vehicle’s interior, including thevinyl floor covering. This coulddamage safety and other systemsin the vehicle, which would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8 274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Underhood Component PowerWashing

If power washing underhoodcomponents, do not exceed theselimits:

. Fluid pressures of 110 bar(1600 psi)

. Fluid temperatures of 25°C(77°F)

. Nozzle must remain 30 cm(12 in) or farther fromcomponents.


430 Vehicle Care

Automatic Car Wash

Caution

Some automatic car washes cancause damage to the vehicle,wheels and ground effects.Automatic car washes are notrecommended, due to lack ofclearance for the undercarriageand/or wide rear tires and wheels.

Caution

Automatic car washes can causedamage to the vehicle, wheels,ground effects, and convertibletop (if equipped).

Do not use automatic car washesdue to lack of clearance for theundercarriage, wide rear tires,and wheels.

If using an automatic car wash,follow with the car washinstructions. The windshield wiperand rear window wiper, if equipped,

must be turned off. Remove anyaccessories that may be damagedor interfere with the car washequipment.

See Power Assist Steps 0 34 forcleaning information.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Wash

the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 431

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome orstainless steel. To prevent damagealways follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chromeor stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Spray-In Bedliner Care

Caution

Using silicone-based productsmay damage the bedliner, reducethe slip-resistant texture, andattract dirt.

A spray-in bedliner is a permanentcoating that bonds to the truck bedand cannot be removed. Promptlyrinse the bedliner surface followinga chemical spill to avoid permanentdamage.

Spray-in bedliners can fade fromoxidation, road dirt, heavy-dutyhauling, and hard water stains.Clean it periodically by washing off

the loose dirt and using a milddetergent. To restore the originalappearance, apply the bedlinerconditioner available through yourdealer.

CarbonPro Box Care

Caution

To prevent surface damage to thepickup box, rinse chemical spillsquickly, never use alcohol wipesto clean, and avoid scraping thesurface.

If equipped with a CarbonProPickup Box, use the followinginstructions for cleaning:

. Clean the box periodically bywashing off the loose dirt withwater and a mild detergent.

. Promptly rinse the bed surfacefollowing a chemical spill toavoid permanent damage.

. Use a dry rag to remove oil.


432 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increasefuel economy. Keep the shuttersystem clean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and


Vehicle Care 433

a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Hot, dry climates mayrequire more frequent application.Black marks from rubber material onpainted surfaces can be removed byrubbing with a clean cloth. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and chromewheel trim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium chloride orcalcium chloride. These are usedon roads for conditions such as

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

dust and ice. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage onwheels and wheel trim, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drivethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash that uses silicon carbidetire/wheel cleaning brushes.Damage could occur and therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors


434 Vehicle Care

for surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

2500/3500 Series vehicles, at leastevery engine oil change lubricatethe upper and lower control arm balljoints. Control arm ball joints on1500 series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

2500/3500 Series vehicles equippedwith steering linkage, at least everyengine oil change lubricate the tierod ball joints, idler arm pivot shaftbearings, idler arm socket, andpitman arm socket.

Caution

Lubrication of applicablesuspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from theunderbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect. If equippedwith power assist steps, extendthem and then use a high pressurewash to clean all joints and gaps.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.


Vehicle Care 435

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applycleaners directly to the cleaning

cloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution will

create streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.


436 Vehicle Care

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.


Vehicle Care 437

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact with

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

any plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.


438 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:

. The original equipment floormats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 439

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 439

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 441

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 456

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see"Maintenance Schedule" in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are not

(Continued)


440 Service and Maintenance

Caution (Continued)

approved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 200.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel (Except6.2L V8 Engine) 0 280 orRecommended Fuel (6.2LV8 Engine) 0 281.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain

. Frequently towing a trailer

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 330.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 339.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures, including the spare.See Tire Pressure 0 387.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 396.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 354.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 341.

Engine Air Filter Change

When the REPLACE AT NEXT OILCHANGE message displays, theengine air filter should be replacedat the next engine oil change. Whenthe REPLACE ENGINE AIR FILTERSOON message displays, theengine air filter should be replacedat the earliest convenience. Resetthe engine air filter life system afterthe engine air filter is replaced. SeeEngine Air Filter Life System 0 343.

Passenger Compartment AirFilter

The passenger compartment airfilter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.Inspect the passenger compartmentair filter every 36 000 km/22,500 miles or two years,whichever comes first. Replace ifnecessary. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

Power Take Off (PTO) andExtended Idle Use

When the vehicle is used with thePTO equipment or used in a waythat requires extended idle time,one hour of use shall be deemedthe same as 53 km (33 mi). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)(Base Level) 0 147 orDriver Information Center (DIC)(Midlevel and Uplevel) 0 148 forhourmeter, if equipped.



Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years.This service requires replacement ofthe desiccant to help the longevityand efficient operation of the airconditioning system. This servicecan be complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 396.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 339 andEngine Oil Life System 0 341.

. If equipped with the engine airfilter life system, check the airfilter life percentage.If necessary, replace the engineair filter and reset the engine air

filter life system. See Engine AirFilter Life System 0 343. If thevehicle is not equipped with theengine air filter life system,inspect the engine air cleanerfilter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 344.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 346.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 354.

. Check tire inflation pressures,including the spare. See TirePressure 0 387.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 396.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 429.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage,including cracks or tears in therubber boots, loose or missingparts, or signs of wear at leastonce a year. See Exterior Care0 429. If equipped with grease

fittings, lubricate the suspensionand steering components everyother oil change for normalusage and every oil change forsevere usage.

. Inspect power steering forproper attachment, connections,binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect drive shafts forexcessive wear, lubricant leaksor damage including: tube dents,cracks, constant velocity joint oruniversal joint looseness,cracked or missing boots, looseor missing boot clamps, centerbearing excessive looseness,missing or loose fasteners.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 70.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.


Service and Maintenance 443. Lubricate body components. See

Exterior Care 0 429.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 363.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 363.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 363.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 364.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. If the holdopen is low, service the gasstrut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 365.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 50.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing0 407.

. Visually inspect the spare tire toensure that it is tightly stowedunder the vehicle. Push, pull,and try to turn the tire. If thespare tire moves, tighten asnecessary. See Tire Changing0 407.



Additional Required Services

Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed. Checkengine air filter life percentage and status.Change engine air filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine airfilter life system, replace engine air cleanerfilter. (2)

@ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(Except 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(2.7L L4 Turbo Engine Only) @ @

For GVW under 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), changetransfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @

For GVW over 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), changetransfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood gas struts and tailgatedampener. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, poor air quality, areas withhigh dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GM

Service location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 344.

(3) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 346.



(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 357.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 364.

(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 365.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed. Checkengine air filter life percentage and status.Change engine air filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

If the vehicle is not equipped with the engine airfilter life system, replace engine air cleanerfilter. (2)

@ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(Except 2.7L L4 Turbo Engine) @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(2.7L L4 Turbo Engine Only) @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

For GVW under 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), changetransfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @

For GVW over 3 900 kg (8,600 lb), changetransfer case fluid, if equipped with 4WD. (4) @ @ @ @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (8) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood gas struts and tailgatedampener. (9) @ @

Replace air conditioning desiccant. (10)



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, poor air quality, areas withhigh dust levels or are sensitive toenvironmental allergens. Filterreplacement may also be needed ifyou notice reduced airflow, windowsfogging up, or odors. Your local GMService location can help youdetermine when it is the right time toreplace your filter.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 344.

(3) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or drive axles andshould be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 346.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 357.

(8) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 364.

(9) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 365.

(10) Replace air conditioningdesiccant every seven years.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving.Repeat this service whenever atire/wheel is serviced orremoved.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Care0 429.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs

of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 435 andExterior Care 0 429.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.


Service and Maintenance 451. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (6-SpeedTransmission)

DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.


DEXRON-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid.


DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.See Cooling System 0 346.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil0 339.

Front and Rear Axle DriveshaftSplines

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive) andRear Axle

See your dealer.

Hydraulic Brake System (Vehicleswith DOT 3 brake fluid)

DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19353127). See Brake Fluid 0 357.

Hydraulic Brake System (Vehicleswith DOT 4 brake fluid)

DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299570, inCanada 19299571). See Brake Fluid 0 357.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(2500/3500 Series Only)

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 19329450, in Canada 19329451).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges,Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate

Hinge and Linkage, Fuel Door Hinge,Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,

Latch Bolt, and Linkage

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant. See your dealer.

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

With high capacity air cleaner 84121219 A3244C

Without high capacity air cleaner 84121217 A3246C

Oil Filter

2.7L L4 55495106 PF66

4.3L V6 12690385 PF63E

5.3L V8 12690385 PF63E

6.2L V8 12690385 PF63E

6.6L V8 12690385 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13508023 CF185

Spark Plugs

2.7L L4 12688094 41-106-IP

4.3L V6 12622441 41-114

5.3L V8 12622441 41-114



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

6.2L V8 12622441 41-114

6.6L V8 12622441 41-114

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 84578275 —

Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 84578275 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 457

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Service Parts Identification . . . 457

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 461

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 458 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentificationThere may be a large barcode onthe certification label on the centerpillar that you can scan for thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options

If there is not a large barcode onthis label, then you will find thissame information on a label insideof the glove box.


458 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 452.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System*

2.7L L4 Engine – 1500 Series 11.8 L 12.4 qt

4.3L V6 Engine – 1500 Series 11.5 L 12.2 qt

5.3L V8 Engine – 1500 Series (L82) 12.8 L 13.5 qt



6.6L V8 Gas Engine – 2500 Series and 3500 Series (L8T) 15.1 L 15.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.7L L4 Engine – 1500 Series 5.7 L 6.0 qt


Technical Data 459


Metric English




6.6L V8 Gas Engine – 2500 Series and 3500 Series 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Fuel Tank

1500 Series Standard and Short Box (4WD Gas andDiesel)

90.8 L 24.0 gal

1500 Series Standard and Short Box (2WD Diesel) 83.3 L 22.0 gal

1500 Series Long Box 106.0 L 28.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box (ExceptDouble Cab Diesel)

136.3 L 36.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box (Double CabDiesel)

111.3 L 29.4 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box (Except RegularCab Diesel)

136.3 L 28.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box (Regular CabDiesel)

106.0 L 28.0 gal

3500 Series Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal


460 Technical Data


Metric English

3500 Series Chassis Cab – Rear Tank 151.4 L 40.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid (1500 Series Only) 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Transfer Case Fluid (2500 and 3500 Series Only) 2.3 L 2.4 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

*Engine cooling system capacity values are based on the entire cooling system and its components.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

2.7L L4 (L3B) K 0.65–0.75 mm (0.026–0.030 in)

4.3L V6 (LV3) H 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

5.3L V8 (L82) F 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

5.3L V8 (L84) D 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.2L V8 (L87) L 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.6L V8 (L8T) 7 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

Spark plug gaps are preset by the manufacturer. Re-gapping the spark plug is not recommended and can damagethe spark plug.


Technical Data 461

Engine Drive Belt RoutingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

2.7L Engine

4.3L, 5.3L, and 6.2L Engines

6.6L Engine (Single Generator)

6.6L Engine (Dual Generator)


462 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 465

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 465GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 469Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 474OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 475

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 463

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the BBB National Programs, Inc.to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramBBB National Programs, Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Company wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.gmc.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceallows access to videos, articles,and vehicle health specific to yourGMC as well as your OnStarAccount information all in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 457.

H : Compare and shop for GMCand OnStar plans and Services.View GM Card and SiriusXMinformation (if equipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Owner Centre (Canada)mygmccanada.ca

Visit the GMC Owner Centre atmygmccanada.ca (English) ormy.gmccanada.ca (French) toaccess similar benefits to theU.S. site.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility Assistance



Center at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner or

driver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner's



responsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 500 miles.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not a

regularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside

Assistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner’s responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is



safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate manual

entitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM. If U.S. customers arrangetheir own transportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim

amounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel, rentalvehicle insurance, taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage,or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair are alsoyour responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 466.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 76.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled



original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengine, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electricalsystem, steering system, body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basicoperational information about thevehicle. The owner’s manualincludes the Maintenance Schedulefor all models.

Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase includeowner’s manuals, warrantymanuals, infotainment manuals, andportfolios. Portfolios include anowner’s manual, warranty manual,infotainment manual, if applicable,and zip lock bag or pouch.

Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.



Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withInnovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / ICES-GEN.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;



go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

In the U.S., call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

In Mexico, call 01-800-466-0812 or01-800-466-0801.

In other Central America andCaribbean Countries, call52-55-5-901-23-69.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven or used. Forexample, the vehicle uses computermodules to monitor and controlengine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help the dealer technicianservice the vehicle or to help GMimprove safety or features. Somemodules may also store data abouthow the vehicle is operated, such asrate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may retainpersonal preferences, such as radiopresets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



CybersecurityGM collects information about theuse of your vehicle includingoperational and safety relatedinformation. We collect thisinformation to provide, evaluate,improve, and troubleshoot ourproducts and services and todevelop new products and services.The protection of vehicle electronicssystems and customer data fromunauthorized outside electronicaccess or control is important toGM. GM maintains appropriatesecurity standards, practices,guidelines and controls aimed atdefending the vehicle and thevehicle service ecosystem againstunauthorized electronic access,detecting possible malicious activityin related networks, and respondingto suspected cybersecurity incidentsin a timely, coordinated and effectivemanner. Security incidents couldimpact your safety or compromiseyour private data. To minimizesecurity risks, please do not connectyour vehicle electronic systems tounauthorized devices or connect

your vehicle to any unknown oruntrusted networks (such asBluetooth, WIFI or similartechnology). In the event yoususpect any security incidentimpacting your data or the safeoperation of your vehicle, pleasestop operating your vehicle andcontact your dealer.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.



To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected and transmitted throughthe OnStar system. This includesinformation about the vehicle’soperation; collisions involving thevehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features, including infotainment;and the location and approximateGPS speed of the vehicle. Refer tothe OnStar Terms and Conditionsand Privacy Statement on theOnStar website.

See OnStar Additional Information0 478.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


476 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collectinformation about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar User

Terms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


OnStar 477

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive safety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


478 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar or connectedservices if the vehicle is disposedof, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStaror connected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, and Roadside Assistanceare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.


OnStar 479

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar or connected servicescannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where OnStar has anagreement with a wireless serviceprovider for service in that area. Thewireless service provider must alsohave coverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar orconnected services. Serviceinvolving location information aboutthe vehicle cannot work unless GPSsignals are available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar or connectedservices may not work if the OnStarequipment is not properly installedor it has not been properlymaintained. If equipment or softwareis added, connected, or modified,OnStar or connected services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damage

to the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicle

access to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can beturned on or off by touchingSettings, then Apps, and thenPhone. When TTY mode is on,phone calls can be made orreceived with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.


480 OnStar

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate to

call OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message

may come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 322. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,


OnStar 481

security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such assaved navigation destinations orpre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OR


482 OnStar

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.


OnStar 483

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use ofthe Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


484 Connected Services

ConnectedServices

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specificOnStar or connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For somevehicles, press= to open the

OnStar app on the infotainmentdisplay. For other vehicles press=as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat



Connected Services 485

2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters andnumbers to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On some


486 Connected Services

vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobiledevices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting anOnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyGMC mobile app information andcompatibility, see my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar or connectedservice plan may be required.A compatible device,factory-installed remote start, and

power locks are required. Data ratesapply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle's key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.Features are subject to change. Forupdates on feature capabilities, seemy.gmc.com. Message and datarates may apply.

GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/-Mexico-13337776) - 2020 - CRC - 8/27/19

Index 487

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . 219Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 245Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 322Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 344Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .177, 179Air FilterLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Passenger Sensing System . . . .77

Airbag System (cont'd)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .73AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 136Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 274

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 232Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435


488 Index

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . 257

Auto StopStop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . 270Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Battery (cont'd)Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Battery - North America . . . .358, 419Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 364Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43BrakeElectric Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233System Warning Light . . . . . . . . 139

Brake Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . 356Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188AutomaticEmergency (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Braking SystemFront Pedestrian (FPB) . . . . . . . 272

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 208Bulb ReplacementCenter High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 369Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-upLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120CaliforniaPerchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .329, 358, 419,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115


Index 489

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 113Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 137CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 363Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .86Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 107, 108Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 177Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Climate Control Systems (cont'd)Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 469CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Connected ServicesConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 485

ControlHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Traction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Control LightHill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . 133Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 179Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . 245Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 465Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Customer InformationPublications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 469Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 475OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 474Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27


490 Index

DiagnosticsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 486

Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . 242Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 461Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . 255Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 148

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . 144DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 268Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . 186Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 197If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 199Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 200Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Electric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . 233Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . 140Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 370Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, 376

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Engine (cont'd)Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 332Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 132Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 220Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Engine Air Filter Life System . . . . 343Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 474Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


Index 491

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 171Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 165Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 167Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 169Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 114Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 343Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . .227, 361Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . 141Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . .60

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Economy, Driving for Better . . . 186Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . 283, 285Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 145Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . 219Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Recommended . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 418FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 370Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374, 376

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . 161Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 132Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 439Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328


492 Index

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 169Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 146High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 167Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 146

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 179High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 146High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . 389Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 197Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . 237Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . . 141Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 235Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177, 179

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . .208, 210Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37IndicatorPedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . 471

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 475Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . 5Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 44Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . 13, 16

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 12

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 381LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 168Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137


Index 493

Lamps (cont'd)On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . 274Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . 278Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . 142Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 172LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 139

Lights (cont'd)Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . 144Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 140Electronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . . 144

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 145Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 167Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . 141Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . 141Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 135Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Service Electric ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Lights (cont'd)Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . 242LockSteering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 145Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 441


494 Index

Maintenance Schedule (cont'd)Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 137Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

MirrorRear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 44Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

NNavigationConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . 484

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 208Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 362

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 341Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . 132Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 84Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 465OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478Operating ModeOverheated EngineProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

OperationFog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode . . . . 352

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 351OverviewInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

PParkShifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257ParkingBrake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 364

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 219

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . 257

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


Index 495

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . 77Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . 142Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 329

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 216Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 69PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 473

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 468

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .329, 358, 419,

Back CoverPublication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 472Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 257Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280, 281

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 424Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 16

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 83Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 472General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Ride Control SystemsEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


496 Index

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 461Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 472General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 467Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .71Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .69

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Heated and Ventilated Front . . . .60Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . .56Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .55Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .56Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . .104, 107, 108

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 177Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 330Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 456Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Service (cont'd)Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 467

Service Electric ParkingBrake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 274Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Special Application Services . . . . 448Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 25Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 363Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119


Index 497

Steering (cont'd)Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Steering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . 37StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 112StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemBrake Pad Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Engine Air Filter Life . . . . . . . . . . 343Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

System (cont'd)Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 475Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Task Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 465Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 37Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Tires (cont'd)Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387, 389Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Pressure Monitor Operation . . 390Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 389Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Terminology and Definitions . . 385Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 403When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 141TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 287Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296General Information . . . . . . . . . . 287Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 424Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 308Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424


498 Index

TractionLimited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . 242Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 308Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Trailer TowingApp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Trailering App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

UUnderseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 402Universal Remote System . . . . . . 161Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Identification Number (VIN) . . . 457Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 142Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Vehicle SecuritySteering Column Lock . . . . . . . . . .37

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 139Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . 276

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 403Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 90Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119


Index 499

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 364Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

84186890 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

20_GMC_Sierra_SierraDenali_COV_en_US_84186890B_2019AUG27.ai 1 8/12/2019 1:26:17 PM

2020 GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owners Manual€¦ · GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owner Manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2020 GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owners Manual€¦ · GMC Sierra/Sierra Denali Owner Manual...